forked from qt-creator/qt-creator
		
	
		
			
				
	
	
		
			7535 lines
		
	
	
		
			265 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			Plaintext
		
	
	
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			7535 lines
		
	
	
		
			265 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			Plaintext
		
	
	
	
	
	
| // **********************************************************************
 | |
| // NOTE: the sections are not ordered by their logical order to avoid
 | |
| // reshuffling the file each time the index order changes (i.e., often).
 | |
| // Run the fixnavi.pl script to adjust the links to the index order.
 | |
| // **********************************************************************
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage{index.html}{Qt Creator}
 | |
|     \page index.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-overview.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Qt Creator Manual
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Version 2.0
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides integrated tools for both application designers
 | |
|     and developers to create applications for multiple desktop and mobile device
 | |
|     platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For application designers, Qt Creator provides integrated
 | |
|     visual editors, \QD
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     and \QMLD,
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
|     that you can use to design and develop
 | |
|     application user interfaces.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For application developers,
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides a cross-platform, complete integrated development
 | |
|     environment (IDE) that is available for Linux,
 | |
|     Mac OS X and Windows operating systems. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Please report bugs and suggestions to the
 | |
|     \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
 | |
|     You can also join the Qt Creator mailing list. To subscribe,
 | |
|     send a message with the word \e subscribe to
 | |
|     \l{mailto:qt-creator-request@trolltech.com}
 | |
|     {qt-creator-request@trolltech.com}. For more information about Qt mailing
 | |
|     lists, visit \l{http://lists.trolltech.com}{http://lists.trolltech.com}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \raw HTML
 | |
|     <img border="0" style="float:right;" src="images/qtcreator-screenshots.png" />
 | |
|     \endraw
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o \l{Introducing Qt Creator}
 | |
|        \o \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}
 | |
|        \o \l{Quick Tour}
 | |
|        \o \l{Getting Started}
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o \l{Building and Running an Example Application}
 | |
|                \o \l{Creating a Qt C++ Application}
 | |
|                \o \l{Creating a Mobile Application with Nokia Qt SDK}
 | |
|                \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|                \o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
 | |
|                \endif
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Using the Editor}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Finding and Replacing}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Refactoring}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Searching With the Locator}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Configuring the Editor}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using FakeVim Mode}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using an External Editor}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Managing Projects}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Creating a Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up a qmake Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Managing Sessions}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Building and Running Applications}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Building for Multiple Targets}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Build Settings}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Run Settings}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Specifying Dependencies}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|        \o \l{Developing Qt Quick Applications}
 | |
|        \endif
 | |
|        \o \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}
 | |
|        \o \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}
 | |
|        \o \l{Debugging}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|             \o \l {Debugging Qt Applications}
 | |
|             \list
 | |
|                 \o \l{Debugging the Example Application}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Interacting with the Debugger}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Setting Up Debugger}
 | |
|                 \o \l{Using Debugging Helpers}
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|             \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|             \o \l{Debugging Qt Quick Applications}
 | |
|             \endif
 | |
|             \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|                 \list
 | |
|                     \o \l{Using the QML Inspector}
 | |
|                 \endlist
 | |
|             \endif
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
|        \o \l{Using Version Control Systems}
 | |
|        \o \l{Adding Qt Designer Plugins}
 | |
|        \o \l{Tips and Tricks}
 | |
|        \o \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}
 | |
|        \o \l{Known Issues}
 | |
|        \o \l{Glossary}
 | |
|        \o \l{Acknowledgements}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage index.html
 | |
|     \page creator-overview.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \title Introducing Qt Creator
 | |
| 
 | |
|   Qt Creator provides you with tools to design and develop user interfaces and
 | |
|   complex applications for multiple desktop and mobile
 | |
|   platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \section1 Designing User Interfaces
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|   Qt Creator provides two integrated visual editors, \QD and \QMLD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \QD is a tool for designing and building graphical user interfaces (GUIs) from
 | |
|   Qt widgets. You can compose and customize your widgets or dialogs and test
 | |
|   them using different styles and resolutions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   Widgets and forms created with \QD are integrated seamlessly with programmed code,
 | |
|   using the Qt signals and slots mechanism, that lets you easily assign behavior to
 | |
|   graphical elements. All properties set in \QD can be changed dynamically within the code.
 | |
|   Furthermore, features like widget promotion and custom plugins allow you to use your
 | |
|   own widgets with \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|   UIs that use widgets are clearly structured and enforce a platform look and feel,
 | |
|   which makes them useful for traditional applications. However, they are static, and
 | |
|   do not fully make use of the large high-resolution screens, touch input, and significant
 | |
|   graphics power that are becoming common in portable consumer devices, such as mobile
 | |
|   phones, media players, set-top boxes, and netbooks.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \QMLD allows you to easily develop animations by using a declarative programming
 | |
|   language called \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/declarativeui.html}{QML}.
 | |
|   In QML, a user interface is specified as a tree of objects with properties.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   You use a visual editor to create items, screens, and applications, as well as define changes
 | |
|   in their state. \QMLD generates the necessary code for you.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \note The visual \QMLD editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
 | |
|   enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
 | |
|   visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   You can edit the code in the code editor to add transitions from one state to another,
 | |
|   and interaction to specify user actions that change the states. You
 | |
|   can use Qt or JavaScript to implement the application logic.
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|   \section1 Coding Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|   As an IDE, Qt Creator differs from a text editor in that it knows how to build and run
 | |
|   applications. It understands the code as code, not just as plain text. This allows
 | |
|   it to:
 | |
|   \list
 | |
|       \o Enable you to write well formatted code
 | |
|       \o Anticipate what you are going to write and complete the code
 | |
|       \o Display inline error and warning messages
 | |
|       \o Enable you to semantically navigate to classes, functions, and symbols
 | |
|       \o Provide you with context-sensitive help on classes, functions, and symbols
 | |
|       \o Rename symbols in an intelligent way, so that other symbols with the same name
 | |
|          that belong to other scopes are not renamed
 | |
|       \o Show you the locations in code where a function is declared or called
 | |
|    \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|       \section1 Why Do You Need Projects?
 | |
| 
 | |
|       To be able to build and run applications, Qt Creator needs the same
 | |
|       information as a compiler would need. This information is specified in the
 | |
|       project build and run settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|       Creating a project allows you to:
 | |
|       \list
 | |
|       \o Group files together
 | |
|       \o Add custom build steps
 | |
|       \o Include forms and resource files
 | |
|       \o Specify settings for running applications
 | |
|       \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|       You can either create a project from scratch or import an existing
 | |
|       project. Qt Creator generates all the necessary files, depending on the type of
 | |
|       project you create. For example, if you choose to create a graphical user
 | |
|       interface (GUI) application, Qt Creator generates an empty .ui file
 | |
|       that you can modify with the integrated \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|       \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|       If you choose to create a Qt Quick application, Qt Creator generates a .qml file
 | |
|       that you can modify with the \QMLD visual editor and the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|       \endif
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-overview.html
 | |
|     \page creator-os-supported-platforms.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-quick-tour.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Operating Systems and Supported Platforms
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Operating Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is available in binary packages for the following operating
 | |
|     systems:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Windows XP Service Pack 2
 | |
|         \o Windows Vista
 | |
|         \o (K)Ubuntu Linux 7.04 (32-bit and 64-bit) or later, with the following:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o g++
 | |
|                \o make
 | |
|                \o libglib2.0-dev
 | |
|                \o libSM-dev
 | |
|                \o libxrender-dev
 | |
|                \o libfontconfig1-dev
 | |
|                \o libxext-dev
 | |
|                \o libfreetype6-dev
 | |
|                \o libx11-dev
 | |
|                \o libxcursor-dev
 | |
|                \o libxfixes-dev
 | |
|                \o libxft-dev
 | |
|                \o libxi-dev
 | |
|                \o libxrandr-dev
 | |
|                \o If you are using QtOpenGL, libgl-dev and libglu-dev
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|         \o Mac OS 10.5 or later with the following:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o Xcode tools for your Mac OS X version available from your Mac
 | |
|                   OS X installation DVDs or at \l http://developer.apple.com.
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \omit  ## Are the Xcode tools still needed separately? \endomit
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Build Environment
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To build Qt Creator itself from the source, you need:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Qt 4.7 or later
 | |
|         \o On Windows, MinGW 4.4 or Microsoft Visual Studio 2008
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Supported Mobile Device Platforms
 | |
|     You can develop applications for the following mobile device
 | |
|     platforms:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Maemo and Maemo Application Development and Debugging Environment (MADDE)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes operating system support for building
 | |
|     applications for mobile device platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o {1,3} Operating system
 | |
|             \o {3,1} Platform
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Desktop
 | |
|             \o Symbian
 | |
|             \o Maemo
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Windows
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Linux
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o No
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Mac OS X
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o No
 | |
|             \o No
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
 | |
|     \page creator-quick-tour.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-getting-started.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Quick Tour
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The figure below shows some of the components of Qt Creator in
 | |
|     \gui{Edit} mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-breakdown.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator has been localized into several languages. If the system language
 | |
|     is one of the supported languages, it is automatically selected. To change
 | |
|     the language, select \gui {Tools > Options > Environment} and select a language
 | |
|     in the \gui Language field. The change takes effect after you restart Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Qt Creator Modes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The mode selector allows you to quickly switch between tasks such as
 | |
|     editing project and source files, designing application UIs,
 | |
|     configuring how projects are built and
 | |
|     executed, and debugging your applications. To change modes, click the
 | |
|     icons, or use the \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{corresponding keyboard shortcut}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui Welcome mode for opening recent sessions and projects.
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Using the Editor}{Edit}} mode for editing project and source files.
 | |
|         \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Developing Application UI}{Design}} mode for designing and developing
 | |
|            application user interfaces.
 | |
|         \else
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Using Qt Designer}{Design}} mode for designing and developing
 | |
|            application user interfaces.
 | |
|         \endif
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Debugging}{Debug}} mode for inspecting the state of your program while
 | |
|            debugging.
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Managing Projects}{Projects}} mode for configuring project building and
 | |
|            execution.
 | |
|         \o \gui{\l{Getting Help}{Help}} mode for viewing Qt documentation.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Certain actions in Qt Creator trigger a mode change. Clicking on
 | |
|     \gui {Debug} > \gui {Start debugging} > \gui {Start debugging}
 | |
|     automatically switches to \gui {Debug} mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Browsing Project Contents
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the sidebar to browse files, projects and bookmarks.
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-sidebar.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the content of the sidebar in the sidebar menu:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui Projects shows a list of projects open in the current
 | |
|            session.
 | |
|         \o \gui{File System} shows the content of the currently selected
 | |
|            directory.
 | |
|         \o \gui Bookmarks shows all bookmarks for the current session.
 | |
|         \o \gui{Open Documents} shows currently open files.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can change the view of the sidebar in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To toggle the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
 | |
|            or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
 | |
|         \o To split the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-splitbar.png
 | |
|            . Select new content to view in the split view.
 | |
|         \o To close a sidebar view, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-closesidebar.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Project Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The sidebar displays projects in a project tree. The project tree contains
 | |
|     a list of all projects open in the current session. The files for each
 | |
|     project are grouped according to their file type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the project tree in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To bring up a context menu containing the actions most commonly
 | |
|            needed right-click an item in the project tree.
 | |
|            For example, through the menu of the project root directory you can,
 | |
|            among other actions, build, re-build, clean and run the project.
 | |
|         \o To list all files in a project, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
 | |
|            and select \gui{Simplify tree}.
 | |
|         \o To hide source files which are automatically generated by the build
 | |
|            system, during a build, click \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
 | |
|            and select \gui{Hide generated files}.
 | |
|         \o To toggle the synchronization of your project tree with the file
 | |
|            opened in the editor, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To see the absolute path of a file, move the mouse pointer over the
 | |
|            file name.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The task pane in Qt Creator can display one of the following panes:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Build Issues}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Search Results}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Application Output}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Compile Output}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{General Messages}
 | |
|        \o  \gui{Version Control}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Output panes are available in all \l{Qt Creator modes}{modes}.
 | |
|     Click the name of an output pane to open the pane. To maximize
 | |
|     an open output pane, click the \gui {Maximize Output Pane} button
 | |
|     or press \key {Alt+9}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open the \gui{General Messages} and \gui{Version Control}
 | |
|     panes, select \gui {Window > Output Panes}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Build Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Build Issues} pane provides a list of errors and warnings
 | |
|     encountered during a build. The pane filters out irrelevant output from
 | |
|     the build tools and presents the issues in an organized way.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Right-clicking on a line brings up a context menu with options to copy
 | |
|     the contents and to show a version control annotation view of the
 | |
|     line that causes the error message.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-issues.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Search Results
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Search Results} pane displays the results for global searches,
 | |
|     for example, searching within a current document, files on disk, or all
 | |
|     projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The figure below shows an example search result for all
 | |
|     occurrences of \c textfinder within the \c "/TextFinder" directory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-search-pane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Application Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Application Output} pane displays the status of a program when
 | |
|     it is executed, and the debug output.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The figure below shows an example output from qDebug().
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-application-output.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compile Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Compile Output} pane provides all output from the compiler.
 | |
|     The \gui{Compile Output} is a more detailed version of information
 | |
|     displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-compile-pane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Getting Help
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator comes fully integrated with Qt documentation and
 | |
|     examples using the Qt Help plugin.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To view documentation, switch to \gui Help mode.
 | |
|         \o To obtain context sensitive help, move the text cursor to a Qt class
 | |
|            or function and press \key F1. The documentation is displayed in a
 | |
|            pane next to the code editor, or, if there is not enough vertical
 | |
|            space, in the fullscreen \gui Help mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-context-sensitive-help.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To select and configure how the documentation is displayed in the
 | |
|            \gui Help mode, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Help.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding External Documentation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can display external documentation in the \gui Help mode.
 | |
|     To augment or replace the documentation that ships with Qt Creator and Qt:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Create a .qch file from your documentation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            For information on how to prepare your documentation and create a
 | |
|            .qch file, see
 | |
|            \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.6/qthelp-framework.html}{The Qt Help Framework}.
 | |
|         \o To add the .qch file to Qt Creator, select \gui Tools >
 | |
|            \gui Options... > \gui Help > \gui Documentation > \gui Add.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Documentation Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can filter the documents displayed in the \gui Help mode to find
 | |
|     relevant information faster. Select from a list of filters in the
 | |
|     \gui {Filtered by} field. The contents of the \gui Index and \gui Contents
 | |
|     pane in the sidebar change accordingly.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-help-filters.png "Help filters"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can modify the filters to include external documentation, for example,
 | |
|     or you can define your own filters. To construct filters, you can use the
 | |
|     filter attributes that are specified in the documentation. Each document
 | |
|     contains at least one filter attribute. If several documents contain the
 | |
|     same filter attribute, such as \c tools, you can use that attribute to
 | |
|     include all those documents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add filters:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help > Filters > Add}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Enter a name for the filter and press \gui {OK}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In \gui Attributes, select the documents that you want to include
 | |
|         in the filter.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-help-filter-attributes.png "Help filter attributes"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Help mode, select the filter in the \gui {Filtered by}
 | |
|         field to see the filtered documentation in the sidebar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To modify filters, select a filter in \gui Filters, select the attributes,
 | |
|     and then click \gui Apply.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove filters, select them in \gui Filters, and click \gui Remove.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Navigating with Keyboard
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator caters not only to developers who are used to using the mouse,
 | |
|     but also to developers who are more comfortable with the keyboard. A wide
 | |
|     range of \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{keyboard} and
 | |
|     \l{Searching With the Locator}{navigation} shortcuts are available to help
 | |
|     speed up the process of developing your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Developing Application UI
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To help you design the user interface of your application, two visual
 | |
|     editors are integrated into Qt Creator:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|     \o \QD
 | |
|     \o \QMLD
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The integration includes project management and code completion.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Qt Designer
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically opens all .ui files in \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-formedit.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To change the layout of \QD user interface elements:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} > \gui Views >
 | |
|            \gui Locked.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            When this option is unchecked, you can change the layout.
 | |
|         \o Click the header of an element and drag the element to a new
 | |
|            position.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To change \QD properties, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... >
 | |
|     \gui Designer.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Set the class properties and code generation preferences in \gui
 | |
|            {Class Generation}.
 | |
|         \o Set an additional folder for saving templates in \gui{Template
 | |
|            Paths}.
 | |
|         \o Set the grid settings and preview preferences in \gui Forms. To
 | |
|            preview your form with skins, enable \gui{Print/Preview
 | |
|            Configuration} and select your skin. Otherwise default preview
 | |
|            settings are used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To preview the settings, select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} >
 | |
|            \gui Preview, or press \key Ctrl+Alt+R.
 | |
|         \o To specify embedded device profiles, such as style, font, and screen
 | |
|            resolution, select \gui{Embedded Design}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on \QD, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Qt Quick Designer
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can edit .qml files in the visual \QMLD editor or in the
 | |
|     code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In \gui Projects, double-click a .qml file to open it in the code
 | |
|     editor. Then select the \gui {Design} mode to edit the file in the
 | |
|     visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The visual \QMLD editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
 | |
|     enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
 | |
|     visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable or disable the \QMLD visual editor, select
 | |
|     \gui {Help > About Plugins... > Qt Quick > QmlDesigner}. You must restart Qt Creator
 | |
|     to enable or disable the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-visual-editor.png "Visual editor"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the visual editor panes to manage your project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {Navigator} pane displays the items in the scene. You can
 | |
|     show and hide items to focus on specific parts of the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {Library} pane displays lists of predefined \gui {Items} and
 | |
|     imported \gui {Resources} that you can use to design applications. The
 | |
|     images and other files that you copy to the project folder appear in the
 | |
|     \gui {Resources} pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {Properties} pane displays the properties of the selected component.
 | |
|      You can also change the properties in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui {State} pane displays the different states of the component. To add
 | |
|     states, click the empty slot. Then modify the new state in the editor.
 | |
|     In the code editor, you can see the changes recorded as changes to
 | |
|     the base state.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-qml-application.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-using.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-finding.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using the Editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator's code editor is designed to aid you in creating, editing and
 | |
|     navigating code.  Qt Creator's code editor is fully equipped with syntax
 | |
|     checking, code completion, context sensitive help and in-line error
 | |
|     indicators while you are typing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Editor Toolbar
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The editor toolbar is located at the top of the editor view. The editor
 | |
|     toolbar is context sensitive and shows items relevant to the file currently
 | |
|     open in the editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-editortoolbar-symbols.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the toolbar to navigate between open files and symbols in use:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To browse forward or backward through your location history, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
 | |
|            and \inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To go to any open file, select it from the \gui{Open files}
 | |
|            drop-down menu.
 | |
|         \o To jump to any symbol used in the current file, select it from the
 | |
|            \gui Symbols drop-down menu.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create or edit forms in a \c{.ui} file, the toolbar contains
 | |
|     Qt Designer specific tools.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Splitting the Editor View
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Split the editor view when you want to work on and view multiple files on
 | |
|     the same screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-spliteditorview.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can split the editor view in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To split the editor view into a top and bottom view, select
 | |
|            \gui Window > \gui Split or press \key{Ctrl+E, 2}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Split command creates views below the currently active editor view.
 | |
|         \o To split the editor view into adjacent views, select
 | |
|            \gui Window > \gui{Split Side by Side} or press
 | |
|            \key{Ctrl+E, 3}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Side by side split command creates views to the right of the
 | |
|            currently active editor view.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move between split views, select \gui Window >
 | |
|     \gui{Go to Next Split} or press \key{Ctrl+E, O}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To remove a split view, place the cursor within the view you want to
 | |
|     remove and select \gui Window > \gui{Remove Current Split} or press
 | |
|     \key{Ctrl+E, 0}. To remove all but the currently selected split view,
 | |
|     select \gui Window > \gui{Remove All Splits} or press \key{Ctrl+E, 1}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Highlighting and Folding Blocks
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use block highlighting to visually separate parts of the code that belong
 | |
|     together. For example, when you place the cursor within the braces,
 | |
|     the code enclosed in braces is highlighted.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-blockhighlighting.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable block highlighting, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Highlight blocks}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the folding markers to collapse and expand blocks of code within
 | |
|     braces. Click the folding marker to collapse or expand a block. In the
 | |
|     figure above, the folding markers are located between the line number and
 | |
|     the text pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To show the folding markers, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Display folding markers}. This
 | |
|     option is enabled by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the cursor is on a brace, the matching brace is animated
 | |
|     by default. To turn off the animation and just highlight the block and
 | |
|     the braces, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Display} and
 | |
|     deselect \gui {Animate matching parentheses}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Checking Code Syntax
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As you write code Qt Creator checks code syntax. When Qt Creator spots a
 | |
|     syntax error in your code it underlines it and shows error details when you
 | |
|     move the mouse pointer over the error.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Syntax errors are underlined in red.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            In the following figure, a semicolon is missing at the end of the
 | |
|            line.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-syntaxerror.png
 | |
|         \o Semantic errors and warnings are underlined in olive.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            In the following figure, the type is unknown.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-semanticerror.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Completing Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator understands the code as code, not just as plain text. This
 | |
|     allows it to help you to write well formatted code and to anticipate
 | |
|     what you are going to write and complete the code.
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     The code completion differs somewhat depending on whether you write Qt code or QML code.
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing Qt Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As you write code, Qt Creator provides a list of context-sensitive
 | |
|     suggestions to the statement currently under your cursor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-codecompletion.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open the list of suggestions at any time, press \key{Ctrl+Space}.
 | |
|     If only one option is available, Qt Creator inserts it automatically.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When completion is invoked manually, Qt Creator completes the common prefix
 | |
|     of the list of suggestions. This is especially useful for classes with
 | |
|     several similarly named members. To disable this functionality, uncheck
 | |
|     \gui{Autocomplete common prefix} in the code completion preferences.
 | |
|     Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Completion.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, code completion considers only the first letter case-sensitive.
 | |
|     To apply full or no case-sensitivity, select the option in the
 | |
|     \gui {Case-sensitivity} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table lists available types for code completion and icon
 | |
|     used for each.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Icon
 | |
|             \o Description
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/class.png
 | |
|             \i  A class
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/enum.png
 | |
|             \i  An enum
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/enumerator.png
 | |
|             \i  An enumerator (value of an enum)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/func.png
 | |
|             \i  A function
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/func_priv.png
 | |
|             \i  A private function
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/func_prot.png
 | |
|             \i  A protected function
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/var.png
 | |
|             \i  A variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/var_priv.png
 | |
|             \i  A private variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/var_prot.png
 | |
|             \i  A protected variable
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/signal.png
 | |
|             \i  A signal
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/slot.png
 | |
|             \i  A slot
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/slot_priv.png
 | |
|             \i  A private slot
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/slot_prot.png
 | |
|             \i  A protected slot
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/keyword.png
 | |
|             \i  A keyword
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/macro.png
 | |
|             \i  A macro
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \inlineimage completion/namespace.png
 | |
|             \i  A namespace
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing QML Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     As you write QML code, Qt Creator suggests properties, IDs, and code
 | |
|     snippets to complete the code. The snippets can consist of multiple
 | |
|     fields that you specify values for. Select an item in the list and press
 | |
|     \key Tab or \key Enter to complete the code. Press \key Tab to
 | |
|     move between the fields and specify values for them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-code-completion.png "Completing QML code"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Bookmarks
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To insert or delete a bookmark right-click the line number and select
 | |
|     \gui{Toggle Bookmark} or press \key{Ctrl+M}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-togglebookmark.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To go to previous bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+,}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To go to next bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+.}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Qt Creator you can move directly to the definition or the declaration of
 | |
|     a symbol by holding the \key Ctrl and clicking the symbol.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable this moving function, in \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Behavior select \gui{Enable mouse navigation}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Update Code Model
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To refresh the internal information in Qt Creator pertaining to your code,
 | |
|     select \gui{Tools} > \gui{C++} > \gui{Update Code Model}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note In Qt Creator indexing updates the code automatically. Use
 | |
|     \gui{Update Code Model} only as an emergency command.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-locator.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-codepasting.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-options.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Qt Creator, you can paste snippets of code to a server or fetch
 | |
|     snippets of code from the server. To paste and fetch snippets of code,
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses the following:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui{CodePaster}
 | |
|         \o \gui{Pastebin.Com}
 | |
|         \o \gui{Pastebin.Ca}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To configure the server, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Code Pasting}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To paste a snippet of code onto the server, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+P}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To fetch a snippet of code from the server, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+F}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To use \gui{Pastebin.Com}, configure the domain
 | |
|     prefix in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Code Pasting} >
 | |
|     \gui{Pastebin.com}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, you might ask colleagues to review a change that you plan to
 | |
|     submit to a version control system. If you use the Git version control system,
 | |
|     you can create a \e{diff} view by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} >
 | |
|     \gui{Diff Repository}. You can then upload its contents to the server by choosing
 | |
|     \gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...}. The reviewers can retrieve
 | |
|     the code snippet by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...}.
 | |
|     If they have the project currently opened in Qt Creator, they can apply and test
 | |
|     the change by choosing \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} > \gui{Apply Patch}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-options.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-fakevim.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-external.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using FakeVim Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, you can run the main editor in a manner similar
 | |
|     to the Vim editor. To run the editor in the \gui{FakeVim} mode, select
 | |
|     \gui{Edit} > \gui{Advanced} > \gui{Use Vim-style Editing} or press
 | |
|     \key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, most keystrokes in the main editor will be
 | |
|     intercepted and interpreted in a way that resembles Vim. Documentation for
 | |
|     Vim is not included in Qt Creator. For more information on using Vim,
 | |
|     see \l{http://www.vim.org/docs.php}{Documentation} on the Vim web site.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To map commands entered on the \gui{FakeVim} command line to actions of the
 | |
|     Qt Creator core, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{FakeVim} >
 | |
|     \gui{Ex Command Mapping}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To make changes to the Vim-style settings, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options...} > \gui FakeVim > \gui{General}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use a Vim-style color scheme, select \gui {Tools > Options... >
 | |
|     Text Editor > Fonts & Color}. In the \gui {Color Scheme} list, select
 | |
|     \gui {Vim (dark)}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To quit the FakeVim mode, click \gui {Quit FakeVim} or press
 | |
|     \key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-fakevim.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-external.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-managing.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using an External Editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open the file you are currently viewing in an external editor, select
 | |
|     \gui Edit > \gui Advanced > \gui{Open in External Editor}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use the external editor of your choice:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Add the editor path to the \c{PATH} environment variable of your
 | |
|            operating system.
 | |
|         \o In Qt Creator select \gui Tools > \gui Options... >
 | |
|            \gui Environment > \gui General.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{External editor} enter the name of the application followed
 | |
|            by \key Space and \tt{\bold %f}. For example, to open the file in
 | |
|            Smultron, enter \tt{\bold{smultron %f}}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To further define how to open the file in the external editor, you
 | |
|            can use the following variables separated by a space:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o Current line number \tt{\bold %l}
 | |
|             \o Current column number \tt{\bold %c}
 | |
|             \o Editor's x position on the screen \tt{\bold %x}
 | |
|             \o Editor's y position on the screen \tt{\bold %y}
 | |
|             \o Editor's width in pixels \tt{\bold %w}
 | |
|             \o Editor's height in pixels \tt{\bold %h}
 | |
|             \o Editor's width in characters \tt{\bold %W}
 | |
|             \o Editor's height in characters \tt{\bold %H}
 | |
|             \o To pass % symbol to the editor \tt{\bold %%}
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note Not all variables work with all editors.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-codepasting.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-options.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-fakevim.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Configuring the Editor
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to configure the text editor to suit your specific
 | |
|     needs. To configure the editor, select  \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Text Editor}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can perform the following configuration actions:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Set the font preferences and apply syntax highlighting in
 | |
|            \gui{Font & Colors}.
 | |
|         \o Set tabs, indentation, the handling of whitespace, and mouse operations in
 | |
|            \gui Behavior.
 | |
|         \o Set various display properties, for example,
 | |
|            \l{Highlighting and folding blocks}{highlighting and folding blocks},
 | |
|            text wrapping or \l{Moving to symbol definition or declaration}
 | |
|            {moving to symbol definition or declaration}
 | |
|            in \gui Display.
 | |
|         \o Configure \l{Completing Code}{code completion} in \gui Completion.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Configuring Fonts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the font family and size. You can specify a zoom setting in
 | |
|     percentage for viewing the text. You can also zoom in or out by pressing
 | |
|     \key {Ctrl++} or \key {Ctrl +-}, or by pressing \key Ctrl and rolling
 | |
|     the mouse button up or down. To disable the mouse wheel function, select
 | |
|     \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Behavior} and deselect the
 | |
|     \gui {Enable scroll wheel zooming} check box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Antialiasing is used by default to make text look smoother and more
 | |
|     readable on the screen. Deselect the \gui Antialias check box to
 | |
|     turn off antialiasing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Defining Color Schemes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select one of the predefined color schemes for syntax highlighting
 | |
|     or create customized color schemes. To create a color scheme:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Fonts & Color > Copy}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Enter a name for the color scheme and click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Foreground field, specify the color of the selected
 | |
|         code element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Background field, select the background
 | |
|         color for the code element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The backgound of the \gui Text element determines the background of the
 | |
|         code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you copy code from Qt Creator, it is copied in both plain text and HTML
 | |
|     format. The latter makes sure that syntax highlighting is preserved when
 | |
|     pasting to a rich-text editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Indenting Code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you type code, it is indented automatically according to the selected
 | |
|     options. Select a block to indent it when you press \key Tab.
 | |
|     Press \key {Shift+Tab} to decrease the indentation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you press \gui Backspace the indentation is decreased by one level,
 | |
|     instead of one space, by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, the tab-length in code editor is 8 spaces, but you can change
 | |
|     it. The code editor can also determine whether tabs or spaces are used
 | |
|     on the previous or next line and copy the style.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can determine whether the block indent style includes braces,
 | |
|     or you can use the GNU indent style. The GNU style places braces on a separate
 | |
|     line, indented by 2 spaces, except when they open a function definition, where
 | |
|     they are not indented.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet illustrates excluding braces from the indented block:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     void foobar(bool zoo)
 | |
|     {
 | |
|         if (zoo)
 | |
|         {
 | |
|             foo();
 | |
|         }
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet illustrates including braces in the indented block:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     void foobar(bool zoo)
 | |
|     {
 | |
|         if (zoo)
 | |
|             {
 | |
|             foo();
 | |
|             }
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet illustrates the GNU style:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     void foobar(bool zoo)
 | |
|     {
 | |
|       if (zoo)
 | |
|         {
 | |
|           foo();
 | |
|         }
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-using.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-finding.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-refactoring.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Finding and Replacing
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To search through the currently open file:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Press \key Ctrl+F or select \gui Edit > \gui Find/Replace >
 | |
|            \gui{Find/Replace}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the text you are looking for.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            If the text is found, all occurrences are highlighted as you type.
 | |
|         \o To go to the next occurrence, click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
 | |
|            , or press \key F3. To go to the previous occurrence click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
 | |
|            , or press \key Shift+F3.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can restrict the search in the \gui Find field by selecting one
 | |
|     or several search criteria:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To make your search case sensitive, select
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-editor-casesensitive.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To search only whole words, select
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-editor-wholewords.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To search using regular expressions, select
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-editor-regularexpressions.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|            Regular expressions used in Qt Creator are modeled on Perl regular
 | |
|            expressions. For more information on using regular expressions, see
 | |
|            \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.6/qregexp.html#details}
 | |
|            {Detailed Description} in the QRegExp Class Reference.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you have selected text before selecting \gui Find/Replace, the
 | |
|     search is conducted within the selection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To replace occurrences of the existing text, enter the new text in the
 | |
|     \gui{Replace with} field.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the next one,
 | |
|            click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
 | |
|            or press \key Ctrl+=.
 | |
|         \o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the previous one,
 | |
|            click \inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To replace all occurrences in the file, click \gui{Replace All}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Advanced Search
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To search through projects, files on a file system or the currently open
 | |
|     file:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Press \key Ctrl+Shift+F or select \gui Edit >
 | |
|            \gui Find/Replace > \gui{Advanced Find} >
 | |
|            \gui{Open Advanced Find...}.
 | |
|         \o Select the scope of your search:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o \gui{All Projects} searches files matching the defined file
 | |
|                pattern in all currently open projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                For example, to search for \tt previewer only in \tt .cpp
 | |
|                and \tt .h files, enter in \gui{File pattern}
 | |
|                \tt *.cpp,*.h.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \image qtcreator-search-allprojects.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \gui{Current Project} searches files matching the defined file
 | |
|                pattern only in the project you are currently editing.
 | |
|             \o \gui{Files on File System} recursively searches files matching
 | |
|                the defined file pattern in the selected directory.
 | |
|             \o \gui{Current File} searches only the current file.
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|         \o Enter the text you are looking for and click \gui Search.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-searchresults.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|            A list of files containing the searched text is displayed in the
 | |
|            \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o To see all occurrences in a file, double-click the file name in
 | |
|                the list.
 | |
|             \o To go to an occurrence, double-click it.
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-finding.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-refactoring.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-locator.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Refactoring
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Code refactoring is the process of changing the code without modifying the
 | |
|     existing functionality of your application. By refactoring your code you
 | |
|     can:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Improve internal quality of your application
 | |
|         \o Improve performance and extensibility
 | |
|         \o Improve code readability and maintainability
 | |
|         \o Simplify code structure
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Finding Symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To find the use of a specific symbol in your project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In the editor place the cursor on the symbol and select \gui Tools
 | |
|            > \gui C++ > \gui{Find Usages} or press
 | |
|            \key Ctrl+Shift+U.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Qt Creator looks for the symbol in the following locations:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|             \o Files listed as a part of the project
 | |
|             \o Files directly used by the project files (for example, generated
 | |
|                files)
 | |
|             \o Header files of used frameworks and libraries
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|         \o The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
 | |
|            number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-refactoring-find.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can browse the search results in the following ways:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To go directly to an instance, double-click the instance in the
 | |
|            \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|         \o To move between instances, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
 | |
|            and
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
 | |
|            in the \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|         \o To expand and collapse the list of all instances, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-expand.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|         \o To clear the search results, click \inlineimage qtcreator-clear.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Renaming Symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The functions used to rename symbols depends on whether you are
 | |
|     writing C++ or QML code. For QML, you can only rename IDs.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To rename a specific symbol in a Qt project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In the editor, place the cursor on the symbol you would like to
 | |
|            change and select \gui Tools > \gui C++ >
 | |
|            \gui{Rename Symbol Under Cursor} or press \key Ctrl+Shift+R.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
 | |
|            number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-refactoring-replace.png
 | |
|         \o To replace all selected instances, enter the name of the new symbol
 | |
|            in the \gui{Replace with} text box and click \gui Replace.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To omit an instance, uncheck the check-box next to the instance.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note This action replaces all selected instances of the symbol in
 | |
|            all files listed in the \gui{Search Results} pane. You cannot
 | |
|            undo this action.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Renaming local symbols does not open the \gui{Search Results} pane.
 | |
|     The instances of the symbol are highlighted in code and you can edit the
 | |
|     symbol. All instances of the local symbol are changed as you type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To rename an ID in a Qt Quick project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Right-click an ID in the QML code and select
 | |
|         \gui {Rename id}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Rename id} field, enter the new ID.
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|    \endif
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-external.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-managing.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-creating.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Managing Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     One of the major advantages of Qt Creator is that it allows a team of
 | |
|     developers to share a project across different development platforms with a common
 | |
|     tool for development and debugging.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The recommended way to build a project is to use a \l{Using Version Control Systems} {version control system}.
 | |
|     Store and edit only project source files and the .pro and .pri files (for qmake)
 | |
|     or CMakeLists.txt and *.cmake files (for CMake). Do not store
 | |
|     files generated by the build system or Qt Creator, such as makefiles,
 | |
|     .pro.user, and object files. Other approaches are possible,
 | |
|     but we recommend that you do not use network resources, for example.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to specify separate \l{Building for Multiple Targets} {build settings}
 | |
|     for each development platform. By default, \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds} are used to
 | |
|     keep the build specific files separate from the source.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create separate versions of project files to keep platform-dependent
 | |
|     code separate. You can use qmake
 | |
|     \l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.2/qmake-tutorial.html#adding-platform-specific-source-files}{scopes}
 | |
|     to select the file to process depending on which platform qmake is run on.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Items such as open files, breakpoints, and watches are stored in
 | |
|     \l{Managing Sessions}{sessions}. They are not considered to be part of the
 | |
|     information shared across platforms.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator is integrated with cross-platform systems for build automation:
 | |
|     qmake and CMake. In addition, you can import generic projects that do not use qmake
 | |
|     or CMake, and specify that Qt Creator ignores your build system.
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o To use \bold{qmake} to build applications, open a \c .pro file. For more
 | |
|           information, see \l{Setting Up a qmake Project}.
 | |
|        \o To use \bold{CMake} to build applications you need to have CMake version
 | |
|           2.8.0 or later installed. For more information, see
 | |
|           \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}.
 | |
|        \o To use \bold{other build systems} to build applications, specify which files belong to
 | |
|           your project and which include directories or defines you want to pass
 | |
|           to your compiler. For more information, see
 | |
|           \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides support for \l{Building and Running Applications}{building and running} Qt applications for
 | |
|     desktop environment and mobile devices. When you install the Nokia Qt SDK,
 | |
|     the build and run settings for the Maemo and Symbian targets are set up
 | |
|     automatically. However, you need to install and configure some additional software
 | |
|     on the devices:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The only supported build system for mobile applications in Qt
 | |
|     Creator is qmake.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once your mobile application is ready, you can test it in the Qt Simulator.
 | |
|     You can also connect Maemo and Symbian devices to your development PC and
 | |
|     debug applications on the devices. After you have tested the application,
 | |
|     you can deploy it on mobile devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Developing applications for mobile devices is different from developing
 | |
|     desktop applications. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To change the location of the project directory, and to make changes in
 | |
|     the build and run settings, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui{Projects} > \gui{General}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 External Libraries
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
 | |
|     syntax highlighting for external libraries as if they were a part of the
 | |
|     current project or the Qt library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The procedure of adding a library to a project depends on the type of
 | |
|     project, which influences the build system used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o For information on adding external libraries to qmake projects, see
 | |
|           \l{Adding External Libraries to a qmake Project}.
 | |
|        \o For information on adding external libraries to CMake projects, see
 | |
|           \l{Adding External Libraries to a CMake Project}.
 | |
|    \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-managing.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-creating.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-qmake.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You use wizards to create and import several types of projects and files, such
 | |
|     as Qt GUI or console applications.
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     and Qt Quick applications
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
|     You can also use
 | |
|     wizards to add individual files to your projects. For example, you can create
 | |
|     the following types of files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt resource files, which allow you to store binary files in the
 | |
|         application executable
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \QD forms and Qt QML files, which specify parts of application user
 | |
|         interfaces
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o C++ class, source, or header files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The wizards prompt you to enter the settings needed
 | |
|     for that particular type of project and create the necessary files for you.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-new-project.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Project Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a new project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project} and select the type of your
 | |
|            project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The contents of the following dialogs depend on the project type.
 | |
|            Follow the instructions of the wizard.
 | |
|            This example uses \gui {Qt Gui Application}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Name the project and set its path. To select the path from a
 | |
|            directory tree, click \gui Browse.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Avoid using spaces and special characters in the project name and
 | |
|            path.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-intro-and-location.png
 | |
|         \o Specify the name of the class you want to create and using the
 | |
|            drop-down menu select its base class type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Note that the \gui{Header file}, \gui{Source file} and
 | |
|            \gui{Form file} fields are automatically updated as you name your
 | |
|            class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-class-info.png
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            To create the project, click \gui Finish.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-new-project-summary.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding New Project Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have a team working on a large application or several applications,
 | |
|     you might want to standardize the way the team members create projects
 | |
|     and classes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the wizard templates in the \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards}
 | |
|     folder to create your own project and class wizards. Qt Creator looks in the
 | |
|     folder and adds all wizards defined in wizard.xml files to the \gui New dialog
 | |
|     that opens when you select \gui {File > New File or Project}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In a project wizard, you can specify the files needed in a project.
 | |
|     You can add wizard pages to allow developers to specify settings for the
 | |
|     projcet.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In a class wizard, you can allow developers to specify the class name, base
 | |
|     class, and header and source files for the class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To see how this works, rename wizard_example.xml as wizard.xml in the helloworld
 | |
|     and listmodels folders. After you restart Qt Creator, the \gui {Custom Classes}
 | |
|     and \gui {Custom Projects} categories appear in the \gui New dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-custom-project-wizards.png "The New dialog with custom projects and classes"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Project Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a project wizard:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Make a copy of the \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/helloworld} or
 | |
|         \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/listmodel} folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify the wizard_example.xml file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code determines the type of the wizard and its place
 | |
|         in the \gui New dialog:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <wizard version="1" kind="project"
 | |
|         class="qt4project" firstpage="10"
 | |
|         id="A.HelloWorld" category="B.CustomProjects">
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c version is the version of the file contents. Do not modify this value.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c kind specifies the type of the wizard: \c project or \c class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c class specifies the type of the project. Currently the only available
 | |
|             type is \c qt4project, which specifies a Qt console project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c firstpage specifies the place of the new page in the standard project
 | |
|             wizard. The value 10 ensures that the custom page appears after the standard
 | |
|             pages, as the last page of the wizard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c id is the unique identifier for your wizard. The letter specifies the
 | |
|             position of the wizard within the \c category. The HelloWorld wizard appears
 | |
|             as the first wizard in the second category in the \gui New dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c category is the category in which to place the wizard in the list.
 | |
|             The letter specifies the position of the category in the list in the \gui New
 | |
|             dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies the icon and text that appear in the \gui New
 | |
|          dialog:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <icon>console.png</icon>
 | |
|         <description>Creates a hello-world-project with custom message.</description>
 | |
|         <description xml:lang="de">Erzeugt ein Hello-Welt-Projekt mit einer Nachricht.</description>
 | |
|         <displayname>Hello World</displayname>;
 | |
|         <displayname xml:lang="de">Hallo Welt</displayname>;
 | |
|         <displaycategory>Custom Projects</displaycategory>
 | |
|         <displaycategory xml:lang="de">Benutzerdefinierte Projekte</displaycategory>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c icon appears next to the \c displayName.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c description appears at the bottom of the \gui New dialog when you
 | |
|             select the display name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c displayName appears in the \gui New dialog, under the
 | |
|             \c displayCategory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             You can add translations as values for the text elements. Specify the target
 | |
|             language as an attribute for the element. Use locale names (QLocale).
 | |
|             For example, \c {xml:lang="de"}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <files>
 | |
|             <file source="main.cpp" openeditor="true" />
 | |
|             <file source="project.pro" target="%ProjectName%.pro" openproject="true" />
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c source specifies the file to copy to the project. The files must be
 | |
|             located in the wizard folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c target specifies the new filename for the file. The \c {%ProjectName%}
 | |
|             variable is replaced with the string that users specify in the \gui Name
 | |
|             field on the first page of the wizard.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c openproject indicates that the file is a project file which is to be opened
 | |
|             after the wizard has finished.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c openeditor indicates that the file is to be opened in an editor after
 | |
|             the wizard has finished.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code creates a page that specifies settings for the project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <!-- Create a 2nd wizard page with parameters -->
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle>Hello World Parameters</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle xml:lang="de">Hallo Welt Parameter</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fields>
 | |
|             <field mandatory="true" name="MESSAGE">
 | |
|                 <fieldcontrol class="QLineEdit" validator='^[^"]+$'  defaulttext="Hello world!" />
 | |
|                 <fielddescription>Hello world message:</fielddescription>
 | |
|                 <fielddescription xml:lang="de">Hallo-Welt-Nachricht:</fielddescription>
 | |
|             </field>
 | |
|         </fields>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c fieldpagetitle specifies the title of the page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c field specifies whether the field is mandatory (\c true or \c false).
 | |
|             You can use the value of the \c name field as a variable in other files (for
 | |
|             example, \c {%MESSAGE%}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c fieldcontrol specifies the field. \c class specifies the field type.
 | |
|             You can use interface objects from the QWidget class to create fields. This
 | |
|             example uses QLineEdit to create an input field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c validator specifies a regular expression to check the characters allowed in
 | |
|             the field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c defaulttext specifies text that appears in the field by default.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o \c fielddescription specifies the field name that appears on the wizard page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Class Wizards
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The widget.xml file for a class wizard is very similar to that for a project
 | |
|     wizard. The differences are discussed below.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a class wizard:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies settings for the wizard:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <wizard version="1" kind="class" id="A.ListModel" category="B.CustomClasses">
 | |
| 
 | |
|            <description>Creates a QAbstractListModel implementation.</description>
 | |
|            <description xml:lang="de">Erzeugt eine Implementierung von QAbstractListModel.</description>
 | |
| 
 | |
|            <displayname>QAbstractListModel implementation</displayname>
 | |
|            <displayname xml:lang="de">Implementierung von QAbstractListModel</displayname>
 | |
| 
 | |
|            <displaycategory>Custom Classes</displaycategory>
 | |
|            <displaycategory xml:lang="de">Benutzerdefinierte Klassen</displaycategory>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         For more information about the elements and their values, see
 | |
|         \l {Creating Project Wizards}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <files>
 | |
|             <file source="listmodel.cpp" target="%ClassName:l%.%CppSourceSuffix%"  openeditor="true" />
 | |
|             <file source="listmodel.h" target="%ClassName:l%.%CppHeaderSuffix%"  openeditor="true" />
 | |
|         </files>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Here, \c target contains the following variables that are used to construct
 | |
|         the filename:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {%ClassName:l%} is replaced with the value of the \c ClassName field.
 | |
|         The modifier \c l converts the string to lower case, to observe Qt
 | |
|         conventions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {%CppSourceSuffix%} is replaced by the default source suffix, which
 | |
|         is defined in Qt Creator in \gui {Tools > Options... > C++ > File Naming}.
 | |
|         For example, if users enter \bold MyClass, the filename becomes myclass.cpp
 | |
|         when the project is created.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \c {%CppHeaderSuffix%} is replaced by the default header suffix, which
 | |
|         is also defined in \gui {File Naming}. Here, the filename would
 | |
|         become myclass.h.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o The following code creates a page that allows users to select the class
 | |
|         name, base class, and header and source files for the class:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <!-- Create parameter wizard page -->
 | |
| 
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle>ListModel parameters</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fieldpagetitle xml:lang="de">Parameter des ListModel</fieldpagetitle>
 | |
|         <fields>
 | |
|             <field name="ClassName">
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fieldcontrol class="QLineEdit" validator="^[a-zA-Z0-9_]+$" defaulttext="MyListModel" />
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fielddescription>Class name:</fielddescription>
 | |
|                 <fielddescription xml:lang="de">Klassenname:</fielddescription>
 | |
|             </field>
 | |
|             <field name="Datatype">
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fieldcontrol class="QComboBox" combochoices="QString,int" defaultindex="0" />
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 <fielddescription>Data type:</fielddescription>
 | |
|                 <fielddescription xml:lang="de">Datentyp:</fielddescription>
 | |
|             </field>
 | |
|         </fields>
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         In addition to QLineEdit, QComboBox is used in the class wizard to create
 | |
|         a field. \c combochoices specifies the options in the combobox and
 | |
|         \c defaultindex specifies that QString is the default value.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-creating.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-qmake.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-cmake.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up a qmake Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The qmake tool helps simplify the build process for development projects
 | |
|     across different platforms. qmake automates the generation of makefiles
 | |
|     so that only a few lines of information are needed to create each makefile.
 | |
|     qmake can be used for any software project, whether it is written in Qt or not.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The qmake tool generates a makefile based on the information in a project
 | |
|     file that is generated by Qt Creator. It can generate makefiles for MinGW,
 | |
|     Microsoft Visual studio, and CSL ARM in Windows, and GNU Compiler Collection
 | |
|     (GCC) in Linux and Mac OS X.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about qmake, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.2/qmake-manual.html}{qmake Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Selecting the Qt Version
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to have multiple versions of Qt installed on
 | |
|     your development PC and use different versions for each of your projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If Qt Creator finds \bold qmake in the \c{PATH} environment variable, it uses
 | |
|     that version. The \l{glossary-system-qt}{ qmake version of Qt} is referred
 | |
|     to as \bold{Qt in PATH}. If you intend to use only one version of Qt and it
 | |
|     is already in the \c{PATH} and correctly set up for command line use, you do
 | |
|     not need to manually configure your Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Windows
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version for \bold MinGW:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-windows-add.png
 | |
|            and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name} field.
 | |
|         \o Enter the qmake binary path in the \gui{qmake Location}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the MinGW installation path in the \gui{MinGW Directory}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-mingw.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version for a \bold{Microsoft Visual C++} compiler:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Qt Creator automatically sets the correct environment variables for
 | |
|            compilation. Select the internal version number of the installed
 | |
|            Microsoft Visual C++ tool chain in the \gui Toolchain list.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-msvc.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you are using \bold{Qt for Symbian} and your Symbian SDK is registered
 | |
|     with devices.exe, Qt Creator automatically detects the Qt version. To add a
 | |
|     Qt for Symbian version:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Select the \gui{S60 SDK} you want the Qt Creator to use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-symbian.png
 | |
|         \o To build an application for your device using GCCE, enter the path
 | |
|            to the \bold{CSL ARM Toolchain} directory in
 | |
|            \gui{CSL\\GCCE Directory}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            You do not need to specify this path if the compiler is included in
 | |
|            the \c{PATH} environment variable.
 | |
|         \o To build an application for the emulator (WINSCW toolchain), enter
 | |
|            the path to your Carbide C++ installation directory in
 | |
|            \gui{Carbide directory}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note You need to have Carbide C++ version 2.0 or later installed.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Projects With Linux
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To compile a project in Qt Creator, Linux uses GNU Compiler Collection
 | |
|     (GCC). Intel Compiler Collection (ICC) is supported as a drop-in
 | |
|     replacement for GCC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
 | |
|            \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-linux-add.png
 | |
|            and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the path to the qmake binary in \gui{Path to qmake}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Compiling Projects With Mac OS X
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To compile a project in Qt Creator, Mac OS X uses GNU Compiler Collection
 | |
|     (GCC), which is part of Xcode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a Qt version:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Qt Creator} > \gui Preferences... > \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
|         \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-macosx-add.png
 | |
|            and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name}.
 | |
|         \o Enter the path to the qmake binary in \gui{Path to qmake}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding External Libraries to a qmake Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
 | |
|     syntax highlighting as if they were part of the current project or the Qt
 | |
|     library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add an external library:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Open your project file (.pro) using the \gui Projects pane.
 | |
|         \o Follow the instructions at \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qmake-project-files.html#declaring-other-libraries}
 | |
|            {Declaring other Libraries}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Syntax completion and highlighting work once your project successfully
 | |
|     builds and links against the external library.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-managing-sessions.html
 | |
|     \page creator-building-running.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-building-targets.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building and Running Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides support for building and running Qt applications for
 | |
|     desktop environment and mobile devices. When you install the Nokia Qt SDK,
 | |
|     the build and run settings for the Maemo and Symbian targets are
 | |
|     set up automatically.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add a target if the necessary tool chain is installed on the
 | |
|     development PC and the Qt version is configured. Click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-qt4-addbutton.png "Add Target button"
 | |
|     and select from a list of available
 | |
|     targets. To remove a target, select it and click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-target-remove.png "Remove Target button"
 | |
|     .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can select the targets and click the \gui Run button to build and
 | |
|     run the applications on the targets. You can click the \gui {Build All}
 | |
|     button to build all open projects, one after another.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \section1 Setting Up a Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To view and modify the settings for currently open projects, switch to the
 | |
|     \gui Projects mode by pressing \key Ctrl+5.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-projectpane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The project pane consists of the following tabs:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o \l{Building for Multiple Targets}{Targets}
 | |
|        \note If you have installed only one tool chain, the \gui Targets
 | |
|        tab is replaced by a \gui {Build and Run} tab.
 | |
|        \o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}{Editor Settings}
 | |
|        \o \l{Specifying Dependencies}{Dependencies}
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the \gui Build and \gui Run buttons to switch between
 | |
|     the build and run settings for the active project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have multiple projects open in Qt Creator, use
 | |
|     \gui{Select a Project} option at the top to navigate between different
 | |
|     project edits.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-building-running.html
 | |
|     \page creator-building-targets.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-build-settings.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building for Multiple Targets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Different build configurations allow you to quickly switch between
 | |
|     different build settings. By default, Qt Creator creates \bold debug
 | |
|     and \bold release build configurations.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building for Desktop
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Desktop as the target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building for Qt Simulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Simulator to test Qt applications that are intended
 | |
|     for mobile devices in an environment similar to that of the device. You
 | |
|     can change the information that the device has about its configuration
 | |
|     and environment.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {Qt Simulator} as the target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about using the Qt Simulator, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qt-simulator-beta/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building for Maemo
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Build and run the application for \l{Building for Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Build and run the application for \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}{Maemo Emulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Alternatively, you can build and run the application for a device:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Set up the MADDE development environment and specify a connection
 | |
|         to the device. For more information, see
 | |
|         \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Connect the device to the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Qt Creator uses the compiler specified in the MADDE toolchain to
 | |
|         build the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Qt Creator generates an installation package, installs in on the device,
 | |
|         and executes it. The application views are displayed on the Nokia N900.
 | |
|         Command-line
 | |
|         output is visible in the Qt Creator \gui {Application Output} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Debugging also works transparently.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \section2 Creating Installation Packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|         When you build the application for the \gui{Maemo} target, Qt
 | |
|         Creator automatically generates a debian installation package
 | |
|         in the project folder. You can deliver the installation package to
 | |
|         users for installation on Maemo devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         You can add other files to the installation package in the
 | |
|         \gui {Create package} step in the build configuration. Add files
 | |
|         to the \gui {Package contents} field. In \gui {Local File Path},
 | |
|         specify the location of the file on the development PC. In
 | |
|         \gui {Remote File Path}, specify the folder to install the file on
 | |
|         the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-maemo-deb-package.png "Create installation package"
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building for Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Build and run the application for \l{Building for Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If no problems are found, build and run the application for a device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To test functionality that uses Symbian APIs, you can build and
 | |
|         run the application for Symbian Emulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The build configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target
 | |
|     uses the GCCE tool chain by default. If you want to build
 | |
|     for the device using RVCT, select it in the \gui {Tool chain} field
 | |
|     in the \gui{General} section.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Building and Running for a Device
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Install the required software on the device. For more information, see
 | |
|         \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Connect the device to the development PC through a USB cable.
 | |
|         The target selector displays a green check mark when a
 | |
|         device is connected.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-device-connected.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The tool tip of the target selector shows more details about the actual
 | |
|         device that will be used when you run your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Start the \gui{App TRK} application on your device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can connect several devices to your development PC simultaneously.
 | |
|     In the details of the run configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target,
 | |
|     select the device to run your application on.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Creating Installation Packages
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you build the application for the \gui{Symbian Device} target, Qt
 | |
|     Creator automatically generates a Symbian installation system (SIS) file
 | |
|     in the project folder. You can deliver the installation file to users for
 | |
|     installation on Symbian devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Only installation files signed with a certificate and private key are
 | |
|     allowed to be installed onto Symbian devices. By default, Qt Creator
 | |
|     self-signs the installation file. This self-signing allows you to install
 | |
|     the application on a mobile  device but places limits on what you can do
 | |
|     with the installation file, including:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  Self-signed applications cannot access the more sensitive
 | |
|            \l{Capabilities and Signing}{capabilities} of the mobile device.
 | |
|        \o  Security warnings will be displayed when you install the self-signed
 | |
|            application on a mobile device.
 | |
|        \o  Self-signed applications cannot be distributed commercially on Ovi
 | |
|            Store.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To get around these limitations, you need to go through the Symbian Signed
 | |
|     process. The Symbian Signed organisation manages a public key
 | |
|     infrastructure to provide public authentication of the information in the
 | |
|     application signing certificates. Their security partner can validate your
 | |
|     certificate and give you a Publisher ID. Then, when you sign an
 | |
|     application, other people can be confident that the information in your
 | |
|     certificate is correct and that the application does actually come from you.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     There are also options that do not require you to get a Publisher ID. For
 | |
|     more detail about how the Symbian Signed process works, see
 | |
|     \l{http://developer.symbian.org/wiki/index.php/Complete_Guide_To_Symbian_Signed}
 | |
|     {Complete Guide to Symbian Signed}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you have your own certificate and private key, you can specify them in
 | |
|     the \gui{Create SIS Package} step in your build configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-signing.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Capabilities and Signing
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Capabilities allow the Symbian platform to control access by applications to
 | |
|     the functionality provided by the platform APIs. Access to capabilities is
 | |
|     determined by the device configuration and how the application has been signed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Symbian Signed offers the following signing options depending on the
 | |
|     capabilities that the application accesses:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \bold{Express signed} for applications that access only user and system
 | |
|         capabilities.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \bold{Certified signed} for applications that access also restricted or
 | |
|         device manufacturer capabilities.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note You need to request the rights to access device manufacturer
 | |
|         capabilities from the manufacturer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about how to choose the appropriate signing option, see
 | |
|     \l{http://developer.symbian.org/wiki/index.php/Symbian_Signed_For_Distributing_Your_Application}{Symbian Signed For Distributing Your Application}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you select a signing option that does not allow the application to access
 | |
|     the defined capabilities, installing the application on mobile devices
 | |
|     fails. To avoid problems, only define capabilities and link libraries to a project
 | |
|     if you really need them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about capabilities and how you can check which ones you
 | |
|     need, see
 | |
|     \l{http://developer.symbian.org/wiki/index.php/Capabilities_(Symbian_Signed)}{Capabilities (Symbian Signed)}
 | |
|     and
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/platform-notes-symbian.html#required-capabilities}{Required Capabilities for Qt Applications}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on how to define capabilities for a project, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qmake-platform-notes.html#capabilities}{Capabilities}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Application UID
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A UID is a globally unique identifier that is used to
 | |
|     uniquely identify, for example, an object or file type. In Symbian development,
 | |
|     objects are identified by compound identifiers that are constructed from three
 | |
|     UIDs, namely UID1, UID2, and UID3. UID1 and UID2 specify the category of an
 | |
|     object, whereas UID3 identifies a particular object, such as an application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create a \gui {Mobile Qt Application}, Qt Creator adds a UID3 suitable for
 | |
|     development and debugging automatically to the application .pro file. However, to
 | |
|     distribute your application and get it Symbian signed, you must apply for a UID
 | |
|     from Symbian, who manages the allocation of UIDs. You can request UIDs either one
 | |
|     at a time or as preallocated blocks on the \l{https://www.symbiansigned.com/app/page}{Symbian Signed}
 | |
|     web site.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Replace the testing UID with the distribution UID in the .pro file before you
 | |
|     build the final installation package. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qmake-platform-notes.html#unique-identifiers}{Unique Identifiers}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Building and Running for Symbian Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select
 | |
|     the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target as the active one, and build and run your
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Troubleshooting
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you cannot build the application, check if:
 | |
|      \list
 | |
|         \o You selected the Symbian Device target for building the application.
 | |
|         \o The settings for the Qt version you use to build your project are
 | |
|            correct. The path to the Symbian SDK must point to the Symbian SDK
 | |
|            installation directory.  Select \gui Tools > \gui Options...
 | |
|            > \gui Debugger > \gui{Symbian TRK} and check if it points to the
 | |
|            debugger toolchain.
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
|     If you cannot run the application on a device, check if:
 | |
|      \list
 | |
|         \o The device is connected through the USB cable in \e{PC Suite} mode.
 | |
|         \o \gui{App TRK} is running on the device, using the USB connection,
 | |
|            with the status \e connected.
 | |
|         \o The device is detected and selected in the run configuration
 | |
|            details.
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you cannot run the application in the emulator, check if:
 | |
|      \list
 | |
|         \o You selected the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target for your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If you cannot select \gui {Symbian Emulator} as target, check that
 | |
|         Carbide.c++ is installed correctly and that the path to the Carbide.c++
 | |
|         installation directory is specified in the \gui{Carbide directory} field
 | |
|         in the build settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If the emulator process cannot be started, try closing Qt Creator and
 | |
|            starting the application directly from your file manager. Having
 | |
|            done this, Qt Creator should be able to run your projects in the
 | |
|            emulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \note Qt Creator does not create release configurations for the
 | |
|      \gui {Symbian Emulator} target, because Symbian Emulator supports only debug
 | |
|      builds.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If this does not help to solve your problem, search the qt-creator@trolltech.com
 | |
|     mailing list archives or provide feedback to us via the methods described on the
 | |
|     \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/pages/Home}{Qt Creator Development Wiki}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building with Remote Compiler
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Remote Compiler} target is an interface to a compilation service at
 | |
|     Forum Nokia. It provides a simple, standardized environment for building Qt
 | |
|     applications and creating installation packages for Symbian and Maemo devices
 | |
|     when you do not have the necessary tool chains and SDKs installed or they are
 | |
|     not supported on the development PC. You can choose from a set of supported
 | |
|     devices, such as S60 3rd Edition or S60 5th Edition devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Remote Compiler is an experimental component that you must install
 | |
|     separately from the package that is included in the Nokia Qt SDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the Nokia Qt SDK installation directory, double-click
 | |
|         SDKMaintenanceTool.exe to install \gui {Experimental APIs}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In Qt Creator, choose \gui {Tools > Options > Projects > Remote Compiler}
 | |
|         to log on to Forum Nokia.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image remotecompiler-fn-logon.png "Remote Compiler options"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Projects}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click
 | |
|         \inlineimage qtcreator-qt4-addbutton.png "Add Target button"
 | |
|         and select \gui {Remote Compiler} to add Remote Compiler as a target.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Add to add mobile device platforms as build configurations.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select a build configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Build > Build All}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The installation package is generated in the \gui {Build directory} on
 | |
|     the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about Remote Compiler, choose \gui {Help > Contents >
 | |
|     Remote Compiler}. The document is added during the installation of experimental
 | |
|     APIs.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-building-targets.html
 | |
|     \page creator-build-settings.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-run-settings.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Build Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You specify build settings in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-projectpane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a new build configuration, click \gui Add and select the type of
 | |
|     configuration you would like to add. You can add as many build
 | |
|     configurations as you need.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To delete the build configuration currently selected, click \gui Remove.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Editing Build Configurations
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To edit a build configuration:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select the build configuration you want to edit in
 | |
|            \gui{Edit Build Configuration}.
 | |
|         \o In section \gui General, you can specify:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o The \l{glossary-project-qt}{Qt version} you want to use to
 | |
|                build your project. For more information, see
 | |
|                \l{Selecting the Qt version}.
 | |
|             \o The tool chain required to build the project.
 | |
|             \o By default, projects are built in a separate directory
 | |
|                from the source directory, as \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds}.
 | |
|                This keeps the files generated for each target platform separate.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \note Shadow building is not supported by the Symbian build system.
 | |
|                Also, shadow building on Windows is not supported for Maemo.
 | |
|                If you only build for one target platform, you can deselect
 | |
|                the \gui{Shadow Build} checkbox.
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Build Steps
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The build system of Qt Creator is built on qmake and make. In
 | |
|     \gui{Build Steps} you can change the settings for qmake and make. Qt
 | |
|     Creator runs the make command using the Qt version defined for the current
 | |
|     build configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-steps.png "Build steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Clean Steps
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the cleaning process to remove intermediate files. This process
 | |
|     might help you to fix obscure issues during the process of building a
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-clean-steps.png "Clean steps"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can define the cleaning steps for your builds in the \gui{Clean Steps}:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To add a clean step using make or a custom process, click
 | |
|            \gui{Add clean step} and select the type of step you want to add.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            By default, custom steps are disabled. Activate custom steps by
 | |
|            checking the \gui{Enable custom process step} check-box.
 | |
|         \o To remove a clean step, click \gui{Remove Item}.
 | |
|         \o To change the order of steps, click
 | |
|            \inlineimage qtcreator-movestep.png
 | |
|            .
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Build Environment
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify the environment you want to use for building in the
 | |
|     \bold{Build Environment} section. By default, the environment in which Qt
 | |
|     Creator was started is used and modified to include the Qt version.
 | |
|     Depending on the selected Qt version, Qt Creator automatically sets the
 | |
|     necessary environment variables. You can edit existing environment
 | |
|     variables or add, reset and unset new variables based on your project
 | |
|     requirements.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-build-settings.html
 | |
|     \page creator-run-settings.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-settings.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Run Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically creates run configurations for your project.
 | |
|     To view and modify the settings, select \gui {Projects > Run}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     The settings to specify depend on the type of the project: qmake project
 | |
|     or Qt Quick project.
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Click \gui Add to add run settings for a project and \gui Remove to remove
 | |
|     the current settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Run Settings for qmake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The run configurations for qmake projects derive their executable from the parsed .pro
 | |
|     files.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Specifying Run Settings for Desktop Targets
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can specify command line arguments to be passed to the executable
 | |
|     and the working directory to use. The working directory defaults to
 | |
|     the directory of the build result.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For console applications, check the \gui{Run in Terminal} check box.
 | |
|     If you need to run with special environment variables set up, you
 | |
|     also do it in the run configuration settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-pprunsettings.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also create custom executable run configurations where you
 | |
|     can set the executable to be run. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Specifying a Custom Executable to Run}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Specifying Run Settings for Symbian Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically detects Symbian devices that are connected to
 | |
|     the development PC with an USB cable.
 | |
|     If only one device is detected, the application is deployed
 | |
|     and run on it. If multiple devices are connected to the PC,
 | |
|     make sure that the correct device is selected in the
 | |
|     \gui {Symbian Device} run settings for your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also pass command line arguments to your application on the device.
 | |
|     Press the \gui{Device info button} to get more information about the selected
 | |
|     device, such as the CPU type and the running TRK version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-symbian-run-settings.png "Run settings for Symbian devices"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Specifying Run Settings for Maemo Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To run an application on a Maemo device, create and select
 | |
|     a device configuration in the Maemo run settings for your project.
 | |
|     You can also pass command line arguments to your application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-screenshot-run-settings.png "Run settings for Maemo devices"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying a Custom Executable to Run
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you use cmake or the generic project type in Qt Creator, or want
 | |
|     to run a custom desktop executable, create a \gui {Custom Executable}
 | |
|     run configuration for your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Specify the executable to run, command line arguments, working directory,
 | |
|     and environment variables to use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-run-custom-exe.png "Run settings for custom executables"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Run Settings for Qt Quick Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select run settings in the \gui {Run configuration} field. The settings
 | |
|     are specified automatically and, usually, you do not need to change them:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {QML Viewer} is the path to the \QQV executable.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {QML Viewer arguments} sets arguments for running \QQV.
 | |
|         The \c{-I <directory>} argument searches for C++ or QML plugins from
 | |
|         the project folder. For a list of available arguments, enter \c {qml --help}
 | |
|         on the command line.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Main QML file} is the Qt Quick project file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Debugging address} is the IP address to access \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Debugging port} is the port to access \QQV. You can use any
 | |
|         free port in the registered port range.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-run-settings.png "Run settings for Qt Quick projects"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-run-settings.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-settings.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-build-dependencies.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Editor Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To define the default file encoding, select the desired encoding in \gui Projects >
 | |
|     \gui{Editor Settings}. By default, the Qt Creator uses the file encoding
 | |
|     used by your system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-editor-settings.png "Editor Settings view"
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-settings.html
 | |
|     \page creator-build-dependencies.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-visual-editor.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Specifying Dependencies
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you have multiple projects loaded in your session, you can define the
 | |
|     dependencies between them. Inter-project dependencies affect the build
 | |
|     order of your projects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Inter-project dependencies are unrelated inside a qmake
 | |
|     project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-build-dependencies.png "Dependencies view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To define the dependencies between projects:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In \gui Projects, select a project.
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Dependencies.
 | |
|         \o Select projects as dependencies.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-quick-tour.html
 | |
|     \page creator-getting-started.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-build-example-application.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Getting Started
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section contains examples that illustrate how to use Qt Creator
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     and the integrated design tools, \QD and \QMLD,
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
|     to create, build, and run simple
 | |
|     applications:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \l{Building and Running an Example Application}
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Qt C++ Application}
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Mobile Application with Nokia Qt SDK}
 | |
|         \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|         \o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
 | |
|         \endif
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-writing-program.html
 | |
|     \page creator-mobile-example.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-qml-application.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Mobile Application with Nokia Qt SDK
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To complete this tutorial, you must install Nokia Qt SDK.
 | |
|     The installation program installs and configures the necessary tool chains
 | |
|     for mobile application development.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator to create a small Qt
 | |
|     application, Battery Indicator, that uses the System Information
 | |
|     Mobility API to fetch battery information from the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-batteryindicator-screenshot.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Battery Indicator Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
 | |
|     these instructions while you work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Application Project > Mobile Qt
 | |
|         Application > Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-mobile-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-intro-and-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {BatteryIndicator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Select Required Qt Versions} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-qt-versions.png "Select Required Qt Versions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Maemo, \gui {Qt Simulator}, and \gui {Symbian Device} targets,
 | |
|         and click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Targets are listed if you installed the appropriate development
 | |
|         environment, for example, as part of the Nokia Qt SDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Class Information} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-class-info.png "Class Information dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Class Name} field, type \bold {BatteryIndicator} as the class name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Base Class} list, select \bold {QDialog} as the base class type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note The \gui{Header File}, \gui{Source File} and \gui{Form File} fields are
 | |
|         automatically updated to match the name of the class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The BatteryIndicator project now contains the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o batteryindicator.h
 | |
|         \o batteryindicator.cpp
 | |
|         \o main.cpp
 | |
|         \o batteryindicator.ui
 | |
|         \o BatteryIndicator.pro
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-mobile-project-contents.png "Project contents"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The files come with the necessary boiler plate code that you must
 | |
|     modify, as described in the following sections. You do not need
 | |
|     to change the main.cpp file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Declaring the Qt Mobility API
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui New wizard automatically adds information to the .pro file
 | |
|     that you need when you use the Qt Mobility APIs or develop applications
 | |
|     for Symbian devices. You must modify the information to declare the
 | |
|     Qt Mobility APIs that you use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This example uses the System Info API, so you must declare it, as
 | |
|     illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     CONFIG += mobility
 | |
|     MOBILITY = systeminfo
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Each Mobility API has its corresponding value that you have to add
 | |
|     as a value of MOBILITY to use the API. For a list of the APIs and the
 | |
|     corresponding values that you can assign to MOBILITY, see the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtmobility-1.0/quickstart.html}{Quickstart Example}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following code snippet shows information that is needed for
 | |
|     applications developed for Symbian device. Qt Creator generated
 | |
|     the UID for testing the application on a device. You only need
 | |
|     to change the UID and capabilities if you deliver the application
 | |
|     for public use and need to have it Symbian Signed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|     symbian {
 | |
|         TARGET.UID3 = 0xecbd72d7
 | |
|         # TARGET.CAPABILITY +=
 | |
|         TARGET.EPOCSTACKSIZE = 0x14000
 | |
|         TARGET.EPOCHEAPSIZE = 0x020000 0x800000
 | |
|     }
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Designing the User Interface
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the batteryindicator.ui
 | |
|         file in the \gui{Projects} view to launch the integrated \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui{Progress Bar} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qprogressbar.html}{QProgressBar})
 | |
|         widget to the form.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-mobile-project-widgets.png "Adding widgets to the UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to
 | |
|         \bold batteryLevelBar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Completing the Header File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The batteryindicator.h file contains some of the necessary #includes, a
 | |
|     constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You must include
 | |
|     the System Info header file, add a shortcut to the mobility name
 | |
|     space, and add a private function to update the battery level value in
 | |
|     the indicator when the battery power level changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the \c{batteryindicator.h} file
 | |
|         to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Include the System Info header file, as illustrated by the following
 | |
|         code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/batteryindicator.h 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add a shortcut to the mobility name space, as illustrated by the
 | |
|         following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/batteryindicator.h 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Declare a private function in the \c{private} section, after the
 | |
|         \c{Ui::BatteryIndicator} function, as illustrated by the following code
 | |
|         snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/batteryindicator.h 3
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Completing the Source File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
 | |
|     batteryindicator.cpp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the batteryindicator.cpp file
 | |
|         to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Create a QSystemDeviceInfo object and set its value. Then connect the signal
 | |
|         that indicates that battery level changed to the \c setValue
 | |
|         slot of the progress bar. This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \snippet examples/batteryindicator/batteryindicator.cpp 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Use the constructor to set initial values and make sure that the
 | |
|          created object is in a defined state, as illustrated by the following
 | |
|          code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \snippet examples/batteryindicator/batteryindicator.cpp 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that you have all the necessary code, select \gui {Qt Simulator}
 | |
|     as the target and click the
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
 | |
|     button to build your program and run it in the Qt Simulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In Qt Simulator, run the runOutOfBattery.qs example script
 | |
|     to see the value change in the Battery Indicator application.
 | |
|     Select \gui {Scripting > examples > runOutOfBattery.qs > Run}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-mobile-simulated.png "Mobile example in Qt Simulator"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Testing on a Symbian Device
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You also need to test the application on real devices. Before you can
 | |
|     start testing on Symbian devices, you must connect them to the development
 | |
|     PC by using an USB cable and install the necessary software on them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Install Qt 4.6.2 libraries, the Qt mobile libraries, and the TRK
 | |
|         debugging application on the device. For more information,
 | |
|         see \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Start TRK on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select \gui {Symbian Device}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Run to build the application for the Symbian device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Testing on the Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
 | |
|     applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
 | |
|     on a Nokia N900 device with the software update release 1.2 (V10.2010.19-1).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-getting-started.html
 | |
|     \page creator-build-example-application.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-writing-program.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Building and Running an Example Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can test that your installation is successful by opening an existing
 | |
|     example application project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o On the \gui Welcome page, select \gui {Choose an example... >
 | |
|         Animation Framework > Animated Tiles}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-gs-build-example-open.png "Selecting an example"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select targets for the project. Select at least Qt Simulator
 | |
|         and one of the mobile targets, Maemo or Symbian Device, depending on
 | |
|         the device you develop for.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-gs-build-example-targets.png "Selecting targets"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note You can add targets later in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To test the application in Qt Simulator, click the \gui {Target
 | |
|         Selector} and select \gui {Qt Simulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image {qtcreator-gs-build-example-select-qs.png} "Selecting Qt Simulator as target"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click
 | |
|         \inlineimage{qtcreator-run.png}
 | |
|         to build the application and run it in Qt Simulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To see the compilation progress, press \key{Alt+4} to open the
 | |
|         \gui Compile Output pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui Build progress bar on the toolbar turns green when the project
 | |
|         is successfully built. The application opens in Qt Simulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image {qt-simulator.png} "Qt Simulator"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Change the settings in the
 | |
|         \gui View pane, for example, to toggle the orientation by clicking
 | |
|         \gui {Rotate Device}, or choose from the various Symbian and Maemo
 | |
|         configurations by clicking \gui {Device}. You can also simulate various
 | |
|         mobile functions and create your own scripts.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To test the application on a Symbian device install Qt 4.6.2
 | |
|         and the TRK debugging application on the device. For more information,
 | |
|         see \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select \gui {Symbian Device}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Run to build the application for the Symbian device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-mobile-example.html
 | |
|     \page creator-qml-application.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-using.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Qt Quick Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/declarativeui.html}
 | |
|     {QML declarative language}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The Qt Quick specific features and the QDeclarative help are based on a
 | |
|     preview version of the QtDeclarative package. Update Qt Creator when Qt 4.7 is
 | |
|     released.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator to create a small animated
 | |
|     Qt Quick application, Hello World.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-helloworld.png "Hello World"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Hello World Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
 | |
|     these instructions while you work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt QML Application > Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {Hello World}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-new-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The HelloWorld project now contains the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o HelloWorld.qmlproject
 | |
|         \o HelloWorld.qml
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-new-project-contents.png "HelloWorld project contents"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The .qmlproject file defines that all QML, JavaScript, and image files in
 | |
|     the project folder belong to the project. The .qml file contains some example
 | |
|     code that specifies the screen size (200x200) and a label that contains
 | |
|     the text \bold {Hello World}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Designing the User Interface
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Edit} mode, double-click the HelloWorld.qml file in
 | |
|          the \gui{Projects} pane to open it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To set the screen size to that of some Symbian devices in portrait
 | |
|         mode, for example, change the \c width to \bold 240 and \c height to \bold 320.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-helloworld-screen-size.png "Setting the screen size"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Design} to design the UI in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note The visual \QMLD editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
 | |
|         enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
 | |
|         visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Restart Qt Creator to enable the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui {Rectangle} from the \gui {Library} pane to the
 | |
|         scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-helloworld-widget-add.png "Add component to Hello World"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Edit the \gui {Properties} of the component to turn it into a red ball:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui {Colors} section, click the color picker to select a red
 | |
|             color.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui {Radius} field, use the slider to set the radius value
 | |
|             to \bold 50.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \image qmldesigner-helloworld-widget-edit.png "Edit the component"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To create a blue ball, press \key {Ctrl+C} and \key {Ctrl+V} to copy
 | |
|         and paste the red one, and then change its color to blue.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-helloworld-base-state.png "Hello World first view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The first view of your application is now ready.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note You can use graphical design tools to create nice images and
 | |
|         copy them to the projects folder to display them in the \gui {Library}
 | |
|         pane in \gui {Resources}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui State pane, click the plus sign to add another view, or \e state
 | |
|         to the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify the state by dragging and dropping the widgets to switch their
 | |
|         places.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-helloworld-state1.png "Hello World second view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Animating the Scene
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Animate the scene so that the widgets appear to switch places
 | |
|     on the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Edit} to open HelloWorld.qml in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add the following code to create a transition:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|             transitions: [
 | |
|             Transition {
 | |
|                 NumberAnimation { properties: "x, y"; duration: 500 }
 | |
|             }
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note The code editor completes the code for you as you type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o  Click the \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
 | |
|         button to check that the application can be built and run.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Interaction
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Add interaction to the scene to allow users to click on the screen to start
 | |
|     the animation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Design} to open HelloWorld.qml in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui {Mouse Area} from the \gui {Library} to the scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Properties} pane, \gui {Geometry} tab, click the
 | |
|         \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|         button to make the mouse region cover the whole screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the code editor, use data binding to add a \c when statement to
 | |
|         the states sections, as illustrated by the following code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         states: [
 | |
|             State {
 | |
|                 name: "State1"
 | |
|                 when: mousearea1.pressed
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building and Running the Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to build and run the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the screen and keep the mouse button pressed down to run the
 | |
|         animation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note In the \gui {QML Viewer}, select \gui {Skin} and select a mobile device
 | |
|     type to view the application as on a mobile device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-build-example-application.html
 | |
|     \page creator-writing-program.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-mobile-example.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Creating a Qt C++ Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note This tutorial assumes that you have experience in writing basic Qt
 | |
|     applications, using \QD to design user interfaces and using the Qt
 | |
|     Resource System.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator
 | |
|     to create a small Qt application, Text Finder. It is a simplified version of the
 | |
|     QtUiTools \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/uitools-textfinder.html}{Text Finder}
 | |
|     example.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-screenshot.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up Your Environment
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically detects whether the location of Qt is in your \c PATH variable.
 | |
|     If you have installed several Qt versions, follow the
 | |
|     instructions in \l{Selecting the Qt version} to set the Qt path.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating the Text Finder Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
 | |
|     these instructions while you work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Application Project > Qt Gui
 | |
|         Application > Choose}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-new-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-intro-and-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {TextFinder}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
 | |
|         \c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Select Required Qt Versions} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-project-qt-versions.png "Select Required Qt Versions dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Next} to use the Qt version set in the path in your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Class Information} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-class-info.png "Class Information dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Class Name} field, type \bold {TextFinder} as the class name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Base Class} list, select \bold {QWidget} as the base class type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \note The \gui{Header File}, \gui{Source File} and
 | |
|            \gui{Form File} fields are automatically updated to match the name of the
 | |
|            class.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-new-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The TextFinder project now contains the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o textfinder.h
 | |
|         \o textfinder.cpp
 | |
|         \o main.cpp
 | |
|         \o textfinder.ui
 | |
|         \o textfinder.pro
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-contents.png "TextFinder project contents"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The .h and .cpp files come with the necessary boiler plate code.
 | |
|     The .pro file is complete.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Filling in the Missing Pieces
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Begin by designing the user interface and then move on to filling
 | |
|     in the missing code. Finally, add the find functionality.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Designing the User Interface
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the textfinder.ui file in the \gui{Projects}
 | |
|     view to launch the integrated \QD.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Drag and drop the following widgets to the form:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|     \o \gui{Label} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qlabel.html}{QLabel})
 | |
|     \o \gui{Line Edit} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qlineedit.html}{QLineEdit})
 | |
|     \o \gui{Push Button} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qpushbutton.html}{QPushButton})
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-ui-widgets.png "Adding widgets to Text Finder UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Double-click the \gui{Label} widget and enter the text \bold{Keyword}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Double-click the \gui{Push Button} widget and enter the text \bold{Find}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to \bold findButton.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-objectname.png "Changing object names"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \key {Ctrl+A} to select the widgets and click \gui{Lay out Horizontally}
 | |
|     (or press \gui{Ctrl+H}) to apply a horizontal layout
 | |
|     (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qhboxlayout.html}{QHBoxLayout}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-texfinder-ui-horizontal-layout.png "Applying horizontal layout"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Drag and drop a \gui{Text Edit} widget (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html}{QTextEdit})
 | |
|     to the form.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Select the screen area and click \gui{Lay out Vertically} (or press \gui{Ctr+V})
 | |
|     to apply a vertical layout (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qvboxlayout.html}{QVBoxLayout}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Applying the horizontal and vertical layouts ensures that the application UI scales to different
 | |
|     screen sizes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To call a find function when users press the \gui Find button, you use the Qt signals
 | |
|     and slots mechanism. A signal is emitted when a particular event occurs and a slot is
 | |
|     a function that is called in response to a particular signal. Qt widgets have predefined
 | |
|     signals and slots that you can use directly from \QD. To add a slot for the find function:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Right-click the \gui Find button to open a context-menu.
 | |
|             \o Select \gui {Go to Slot > clicked()}, and then select \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             A private slot, \c{on_findButton_clicked()}, is added to the header file,
 | |
|             textfinder.h and a private function, \c{TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()},
 | |
|             is added to the source file, textfinder.cpp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Press \gui{Ctrl+S} to save your changes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about designing forms with \QD, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing the Header File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The textfinder.h file already has the necessary #includes, a
 | |
|     constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You need to add a private
 | |
|     function, \c{loadTextFile()}, to read and display the
 | |
|     contents of the input text file in the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html}{QTextEdit}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the \c{textfinder.h} file
 | |
|     to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Add a private function
 | |
|     to the \c{private} section, after the \c{Ui::TextFinder} function, as
 | |
|     illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.h 0
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Completing the Source File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
 | |
|    textfinder.cpp.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the textfinder.cpp file
 | |
|     to open it for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Add code to load a text file using
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qfile.html}{QFile}, read it with
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextstream.html}{QTextStream}, and
 | |
|     then display it on \c{textEdit} with
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}.
 | |
|     This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 0
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To use \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qfile.html}{QFile} and
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextstream.html}{QTextStream}, add the
 | |
|     following #includes to textfinder.cpp:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o For the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot, add code to extract the search string and
 | |
|     use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html#find}{find()} function
 | |
|     to look for the search string within the text file. This is illustrated by
 | |
|     the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 2
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Once both of these functions are complete, add a line to call \c{loadTextFile()} in
 | |
|     the constructor, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot is called automatically in
 | |
|     the uic generated ui_textfinder.h file by this line of code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     QMetaObject::connectSlotsByName(TextFinder);
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating a Resource File
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You need a resource file (.qrc) within which you embed the input
 | |
|     text file. The input file can be any .txt file with a paragraph of text.
 | |
|     Create a text file called input.txt and store it in the textfinder
 | |
|     folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add a resource file:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt Resource File > Choose}.
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard.png "New File or Project dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Choose the Location} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard2.png "Choose the Location dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Name} field, enter \bold{textfinder}.
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Path} field, enter \c{C:\Qt\examples\TextFinder},
 | |
|         and click \gui{Next}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard3.png "Project Management dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Add to project} field, select \bold{TextFinder.pro}
 | |
|         and click \gui{Finish} to open the file in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Add > Add Prefix}.
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Prefix} field, replace the default prefix with a slash (/).
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Add > Add Files}, to locate and add input.txt.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-add-resource.png "Editing resource files"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Now that you have all the necessary files, click the \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
 | |
|     button to compile your program.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-qml-inspector.html
 | |
|     \page creator-version-control.html
 | |
|     \nextpage adding-plugins.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Version control systems supported by Qt Creator are:
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \i \bold{Version Control System}
 | |
|             \i \bold{Address}
 | |
|             \i \bold{Notes}
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Git}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://git-scm.com/}
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Subversion}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://subversion.tigris.org/}
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Perforce}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://www.perforce.com}
 | |
|             \i  Server version 2006.1 and later
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{CVS}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://www.cvshome.org}
 | |
|             \i
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Mercurial}
 | |
|             \i  \l{http://mercurial.selenic.com/}
 | |
|             \i  Qt Creator 2.0 and later
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses the version control system's command line clients to access
 | |
|     your repositories. To allow access, make sure that the command line clients
 | |
|     can be located using the \c{PATH} environment variable or specify the path to
 | |
|     the command line client executables in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
 | |
|     \gui {Version Control}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     After you set up the version control system, use the command line to check
 | |
|     that everything works (for example, use the status command). If no issues arise,
 | |
|     you should be ready to use the system also from Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up Common Options
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Version Control} > \gui{Common}
 | |
|     to specify settings for submit messages:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o   \gui{Submit message check script} is a script or program that
 | |
|              can be used to perform checks on the submit message before
 | |
|              submitting. The submit message is passed in as the script's first
 | |
|              parameter. If there is an error, the script should output a
 | |
|              message on standard error and return a non-zero exit code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o    \gui{User/alias configuration file} takes a file in mailmap format
 | |
|              that lists user names and aliases. For example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \code
 | |
|              Jon Doe <Jon.Doe@company.com>
 | |
|              Hans Mustermann <Hans.Mustermann@company.com> hm <info@company.com>
 | |
|              \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \note The second line above specifies the alias \e{hm} and the
 | |
|              corresponding email address for \e{Hans Mustermann}. If the
 | |
|              user/alias configuration file is present, the submit editor
 | |
|              displays a context menu with \gui{Insert name...} that pops up a
 | |
|              dialog letting the user select a name.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o    \gui{User fields configuration file} is a simple text file
 | |
|              consisting of lines specifying submit message fields that take
 | |
|              user names, for example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \code
 | |
|              Reviewed-by:
 | |
|              Signed-off-by:
 | |
|              \endcode
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The fields above appear below the submit message. They provide completion
 | |
|     for the aliases/public user names specified in the
 | |
|     \e{User/alias configuration file} as well as a button that opens the
 | |
|     aforementioned user name dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating VCS Repositories for New Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows for creating VCS repositories for version
 | |
|     control systems that support local repository creation, such as
 | |
|     Git or Mercurial.
 | |
|     When creating a new project by selecting \gui File >
 | |
|     \gui{New File or Project...}, you can choose a version
 | |
|     control system in the final wizard page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Version Control Systems
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Tools} menu contains a sub-menu for each supported version
 | |
|     control system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Version Control} output pane displays the commands
 | |
|     that are executed, a timestamp, and the relevant output.
 | |
|     Select \gui {Window > Output Panes > Version Control} to open
 | |
|     the pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-pane.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you create a new file or a new project, the wizard displays a page
 | |
|     asking whether the files should be added to a version control system.
 | |
|     This happens when the parent directory or the project is already
 | |
|     under version control and the system supports the concept of adding files,
 | |
|     for example, Perforce and Subversion. Alternatively, you can
 | |
|     add files later by using the version control tool menus.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     With Git, there is no concept of adding files. Instead, all modified
 | |
|     files must be staged for a commit.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Diff Output
 | |
| 
 | |
|     All version control systems provide menu options to \e{diff} the current
 | |
|     file or project: to compare it with the latest version stored in the
 | |
|     repository and to display the differences. In Qt Creator, a diff is
 | |
|     displayed in a read-only editor. If the file is accessible, you can
 | |
|     double-click on a selected diff chunk and Qt Creator opens an editor
 | |
|     displaying the file, scrolled to the line in question.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-diff.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Viewing Versioning History and Change Details
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Display the versioning history of a file by selecting \gui{Log}
 | |
|     (for Git and Mercurial) or \gui{Filelog} (for CVS, Perforce, and
 | |
|     Subversion). Typically, the log output contains the date, the commit
 | |
|     message, and a change or revision identifier. Click on the identifier to
 | |
|     display a description of the change including the diff.
 | |
|     Right-clicking on an identifier brings up a context menu that lets you
 | |
|     show annotation views of previous versions (see \l{Annotating Files}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-log.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Annotating Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Annotation views are obtained by selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame}.
 | |
|     Selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame} displays the lines of the file
 | |
|     prepended by the change identifier they originate from. Clicking on the
 | |
|     change identifier shows a detailed description of the change.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To show the annotation of a previous version, right-click on the
 | |
|     version identifier at the beginning of a line and choose one of the
 | |
|     revisions shown at the bottom of the context menu. This allows you to
 | |
|     navigate through the history of the file and obtain previous versions of
 | |
|     it. It also works for Git and Mercurial using SHA's.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The same context menu is available when right-clicking on a version
 | |
|     identifier in the file log view of a single file.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Committing Changes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once you have finished making changes, submit them to the version control
 | |
|     system by choosing \gui{Commit} or \gui{Submit}. Qt Creator displays a
 | |
|     commit page containing a text editor where you can enter your commit
 | |
|     message and a checkable list of modified files to be included.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-vcs-commit.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you have finished filling out the commit page information, click on
 | |
|     \gui{Commit} to start committing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Diff Selected Files} button brings up a diff view of the
 | |
|     files selected in the file list. Since the commit page is just another
 | |
|     editor, you can go back to it by closing the diff view. You can also check
 | |
|     a diff view from the editor combo box showing the \gui{Opened files}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Reverting Changes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To discard local changes to a file or project, use the \gui Revert
 | |
|     function or the \gui {Undo Changes/Undo Repository Changes} function
 | |
|     (for Git). The changes discarded depend on the version control system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, in Perforce, select \gui{Revert File/Revert Project}
 | |
|     to discard changes made to open files, reverting them to the
 | |
|     revisions last synchronized from the repository. Select
 | |
|     \gui{Revert Unchanged} to revert files if their contents or file
 | |
|     type have not changed after they were opened for editing.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Git Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Git sub-menu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui {Apply Patch/Apply Patch...}
 | |
|             \i  Apply changes to a file or project from a diff file. You can
 | |
|                 either apply a patch file that is open in Qt Creator or select
 | |
|                 the patch file to apply from the file system.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stash Snapshot...}
 | |
|             \i  Save a snapshot of your current
 | |
|                 work under a name for later reference. For example, if you
 | |
|                 want to try out something and find out later that it does not work,
 | |
|                 you can discard it and return to the state of the snapshot.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stash}
 | |
|             \i  Stash local changes prior to executing a \gui{Pull}.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stash Pop}
 | |
|             \i  Remove a single stashed state from the stash list and apply it on
 | |
|                 top of the current working tree state.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Pull}
 | |
|             \i  Pull changes from the remote repository. If there are locally
 | |
|                 modified files, you are prompted to stash those changes.
 | |
|                 The \gui Git options page contains an option to do
 | |
|                 a rebase operation while pulling.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Clean Repository.../Clean Project...}
 | |
|             \i  Collect all files that are not under version control
 | |
|                 with the exception of patches and project files
 | |
|                 and show them as a checkable list in a dialog
 | |
|                 prompting for deletion. This lets you completely clean a build.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Branches...}
 | |
|             \i  Displays the branch dialog showing the local branches at the
 | |
|                 top and remote branches at the bottom. To switch to the local
 | |
|                 branch, double-click on it. Double-clicking on a remote
 | |
|                 branch first creates a local branch with the same name that
 | |
|                 tracks the remote branch, and then switches to it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \image qtcreator-vcs-gitbranch.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Stashes...}
 | |
|             \i  Displays a dialog showing the stashes created by
 | |
|                 \gui{Stash Snapshot...} with options to restore,
 | |
|                 display or delete them.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui {Stage File for Commit}
 | |
|             \i  Mark new or modified files for committing to the repository.
 | |
|                 To undo this function, select \gui {Unstage File from Commit}.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Show Commit...}
 | |
|             \i  Select a commit to view. Enter the SHA of the commit
 | |
|                 in the \gui Change field.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Mercurial Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Mercurial sub-menu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Import}
 | |
|             \i  Apply changes from a patch file.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Incoming}
 | |
|             \i  Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
 | |
|                 the changes that will be pulled.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Outgoing}
 | |
|             \i  Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
 | |
|                 the changes that will be pushed.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Pull}
 | |
|             \i  Pull changes from the remote repository.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Update}
 | |
|             \i  Look at an earlier version of the code.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Perforce Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you start Qt Creator, it looks for the executable specified
 | |
|     in the \gui{P4 command} field in \gui{Tools > Options... > Version
 | |
|     Control > Perforce}. If you do not use Perforce and want to turn
 | |
|     off the check, clear this field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Perforce sub-menu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Describe...}
 | |
|             \i  View information about changelists and the files in them.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Edit File}
 | |
|             \i  Open a file for editing.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Opened}
 | |
|             \i  List files that are open for editing.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Pending Changes...}
 | |
|             \i  Group files for commit.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Update All/Update Current Project}
 | |
|             \i  Fetch the current version of the current project or all
 | |
|             projects from the repository.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using Additional Subversion Functions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Subversion sub-menu contains the following additional items:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Describe...}
 | |
|             \i  Display commit log messages for a revision.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \gui{Update Project/Update Repository}
 | |
|             \i  Update your working copy.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-editor-refactoring.html
 | |
|     \page creator-editor-locator.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-editor-codepasting.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Searching With the Locator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The locator provides one of the easiest ways in Qt Creator to browse
 | |
|     through projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
 | |
|     You can find the locator in the bottom left of the Qt Creator window.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To activate the locator, press \key Ctrl+K (\key Cmd+K on Mac OS
 | |
|     X) or select \gui Tools > \gui Locate....
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-locator.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To edit the currently open project's main.cpp file using the locator:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Activate the locator by pressing \key Ctrl+K.
 | |
|         \o Enter \tt{main.cpp}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-locator-open.png
 | |
|         \o Press \key Return.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The main.cpp file opens in the editor.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     It is also possible to enter only a part of a search string.
 | |
|     As you type, the locator shows the occurrences of that string regardless
 | |
|     of where in the name of an component it appears.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To narrow down the search results, you can use the following wildcard
 | |
|     characters:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To match any number of any or no characters, enter \bold{*}.
 | |
|         \o To match a single instance of any character, enter \bold{?}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Locator Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Locator allows you to browse not only files, but any items
 | |
|     defined by \bold{locator filters}. By default, the locator contains
 | |
|     filters which locate:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o  Any open document
 | |
|         \o  Files anywhere on your file system
 | |
|         \o  Files belonging to your project, such as source, header resource,
 | |
|             and .ui files
 | |
|         \o  Class and method definitions in your project or anywhere referenced
 | |
|             from your project
 | |
|         \o  Help topics, including Qt documentation
 | |
|         \o  Specific line in the document displayed in your editor
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use a specific locator filter, type the assigned prefix followed by
 | |
|     \key Space. The prefix is usually a single character.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, to locate symbols matching
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdatastream.html}{QDataStream:}
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Activate the locator.
 | |
|         \o Enter \tt{\bold{: QDataStream}} (: (colon) followed by a
 | |
|            \key Space and the symbol name (QDataStream)).
 | |
| 
 | |
|            The locator lists the results.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-navigate-popup.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default the following filters are enabled and you do not need to use
 | |
|     their prefixes explicitly:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Going to a line in the current file (l).
 | |
|         \o Going to an open file (o).
 | |
|         \o Going to a file in any open project (a).
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Using the Default Locator Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following locator filters are available by default:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o  Function
 | |
|             \o  Enter in locator
 | |
|             \o  Example
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a line in the current file.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{l \e{Line number}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-line.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a symbol definition.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{: \e{Symbol name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-symbols.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a help topic.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{? \e{Help topic}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-help.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to an open file.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{o \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-opendocs.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a file in the file system (browse the file system).
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{f \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-filesystem.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a file in any project currently open.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{a \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-files.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a file in the current project.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{p \e{File name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-current-project.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a class definition.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{c \e{Class name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-classes.png
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o  Go to a method definition.
 | |
|             \o  \tt{\bold{m \e{Method name}}}
 | |
|             \o  \image qtcreator-locator-methods.png
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Locator Filters
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To quickly access files not directly mentioned in your project, you can
 | |
|     create your own locator filters. That way you can locate files in a
 | |
|     directory structure you have defined.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a locator filter:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o In the locator, click \inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
 | |
|            and select \gui Configure.... to open the \gui Locator options.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            \image qtcreator-locator-customize.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Add.
 | |
|         \o In the \gui{Filter Configuration} dialog:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o Name your filter.
 | |
|             \o Select at least one directory. The locator searches directories
 | |
|                recursively.
 | |
|             \o Define the file pattern as a comma separated list. For example,
 | |
|                to search all .h and .cpp files, enter \bold{*.h,*.cpp}
 | |
|             \o Specify the prefix string.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                To show only results matching this filter, select
 | |
|                \gui{Limit to prefix}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \image qtcreator-navigate-customfilter.png
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|         \o Click OK.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Configuring the Locator Cache
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The locator searches the files matching your file pattern in the
 | |
|     directories you have selected and caches that information. The cache for
 | |
|     all default filters is updated as you write your code. By default,
 | |
|     Qt Creator updates the filters created by you once an hour.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To update the cached information manually, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
 | |
|     and select \gui Refresh.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To set a new cache update time:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Locator.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{Refresh interval}, define new time in minutes.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-developing-symbian.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-managing-sessions.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-building-running.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Managing Sessions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you exit Qt Creator, a snapshot of your current workspace is stored
 | |
|     as a session.
 | |
|     A session is a collection of:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Open projects with their dependencies
 | |
|         \o Open editors
 | |
|         \o Breakpoints and watches
 | |
|         \o Bookmarks
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you work on a project and need to switch to another project for a
 | |
|     while, you can save your workspace as a session. This makes it easier
 | |
|     to return to working on the first project later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a new session or remove existing sessions, select \gui File >
 | |
|     \gui Sessions > \gui{Session Manager}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-session-manager.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch between sessions, choose
 | |
|     \gui File > \gui Session. If you do not create or select a session,
 | |
|     Qt Creator always uses the default session, which was created the
 | |
|     last time you exited Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you launch Qt Creator, a list of existing sessions is displayed on the
 | |
|     \gui{Welcome screen}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-welcome-session.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-maemo-emulator.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-cpp.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of your
 | |
|     Qt
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     and Qt Quick
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
|     projects while debugging.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator does not include a debugger. It provides a debugger plugin that acts
 | |
|     as an interface between the Qt Creator core and external native debuggers
 | |
|     such as the GNU Symbolic Debugger (gdb), the Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB),
 | |
|     and an internal Java Script debugger. You can use the native debuggers to
 | |
|     debug the C++ language.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debugger-views.png "Native debugger views"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator includes a QML inspector plugin that you can use to debug QML.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-inspector.png "QML inspector views"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you start debugging, the appropriate tool is automatically selected depending
 | |
|     on the type of the project. If you only develop one kind of projects, you can turn
 | |
|     off this automation in \gui {Tools > Options... > Debugger > General}. Deselect the
 | |
|     \gui {Change debugger language automatically} check box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The choice of language also determines the contents of the \gui Debug menu.
 | |
|     The \gui {Start Debugging > Start Debugging} command starts debugging by using the
 | |
|     tool appropriate for the project type. The availability of the other commands depends
 | |
|     on whether \gui C++ or \gui QML is selected in \gui {Debug > Language}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create Qt Quick projects that contain C++ plugins or Qt projects that contain
 | |
|     QML content. While debugging such projects, you can switch between the native
 | |
|     debuggers and the QML inspector during debugging.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch between debugged languages, select \gui {Debug > Language > C++} or
 | |
|     \gui QML. You can also press \key {Ctrl+L, 1} to switch to the native debugger and
 | |
|     \key {Ctrl+L, 2} to switch to the QML inspector.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-helpers.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-qml.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-qml-inspector.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging Qt Quick Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui Debug mode you can use the QML inspector plugin to:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o View the status of the application when it is executed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o View debug output.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Write JavaScript expressions and evaluate them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify the values of properties.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Watch the values of expressions.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note You can press \key {Ctr+Alt+R} or select \gui {Tools > Qt Quick > Preview}
 | |
|     to view QML files that do not belong to projects in \QQV. However,
 | |
|     you can only debug QML files that belong to open projects, because the QML
 | |
|     inspector plugin needs information about the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Modes of Operation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When a Qt Quick project is active and you select \gui {Debug > Start Debugging >
 | |
|     Start Debugging} the application is started in \QQV and inspected by
 | |
|     the QML inspector.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If the Qt Quick project includes C++ plugins, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging C++ and QML Simultaneously}.
 | |
|     \QQV is started, the native debugger is attached to it, and
 | |
|     the application is inspected by the QML inspector.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note This command is available only if \gui QML is selected in
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Language (QML)}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To debug a Qt project that contains QML content, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging C++ and QML Simultaneously}.
 | |
|     The application is started under the control of the native debugger, attached
 | |
|     to \QQV, and inspected by the QML inspector.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You must use the native debugger to set breakpoints to C++ code and to examine
 | |
|     the state of the interrupted Qt application. When a C++ program is interrupted,
 | |
|     for example when a breakpoint is hit, you cannot use the QML inspector.
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \if defined(qtquick)
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-qml.html
 | |
|     \page creator-qml-inspector.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-version-control.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using the QML Inspector
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In \gui Debug mode, you can use several views to interact with the
 | |
|     application you are debugging. Frequently used views are shown by
 | |
|     default and rarely used ones are hidden. To change the default settings,
 | |
|     select \gui Debug > \gui Views, and then select views to display
 | |
|     or hide. You can also lock views. The position of views is saved for future
 | |
|     sessions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-inspector.png "QML inspector views"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting the QML Inspector
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To start an active application under the control of the QML inspector, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging}, or press \key{F5}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The application is run in \QQV. It behaves and performs as usual.
 | |
|     You can view the status of the application when it is executed and the debug
 | |
|     output in the \gui {Application Output} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-application-output.png "Application Output view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting Simultaneous QML and C++ Debugging
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To debug a Qt Quick project that includes C++ plugins, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging C++ and QML Simultaneously}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note This command is available only if \gui QML is selected in
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Language (QML)}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-debugging-simultaneous.png "Start Simultaneous QML and C++ Debugging view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Usually, the settings for \QQV are specified automatically and you do
 | |
|     not need to change them:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Debugging address} is the IP address to access \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Debugging port} is the port to access \QQV. You can use any
 | |
|         free port in the registered port range.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Viewer path} is the path to \QQV executable.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui {Viewer arguments} sets arguments for running \QQV.
 | |
|         The \c{-I <directory>} argument searches for C++ or QML plugins from
 | |
|         the project folder. For a list of available arguments, enter \c {qml --help}
 | |
|         on the command line.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \QQV is started, the native debugger is attached to it, and
 | |
|     the application is inspected by the QML inspector.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing and Modifying Values of Properties
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Properties and Watchers} view lists the JavaScript expressions
 | |
|     in the project and their properties and values. The properties are grouped
 | |
|     by type, but you can also view them in one long list.
 | |
|     Right-click the list of properties to open a context-menu and then click
 | |
|     \gui {Group by Item Type} to change the way in which the properties are
 | |
|     sorted.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If an item does not have an ID, you cannot change the values of its
 | |
|     properties. The item type is enclosed in angle brackets and the value
 | |
|     is grayed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Double-click an item to move to the place in code where it is declared.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can change the values of properties and see the results in \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If the QML inspector cannot retrieve the value for an item or a property for
 | |
|     inspection, the item or property is grayed in the view. Right-click the item list
 | |
|     to open a context menu, and then click \gui {Show Uninspectable Items} to hide
 | |
|     or show the items that cannot be inspected.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Watching Expressions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui {Properties and Watchers} view, you can specify that an expression is
 | |
|     watched. Right-click a property and then click \gui {Watch Expression}.
 | |
|     The \gui Name and \gui Value of the expression are displayed at the bottom
 | |
|     of the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-inspector-watchers.png "Watched expressions"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add JavaScript expressions to object instances to evaluate them.
 | |
|     Right-click the list of items and select \gui {Add Watch Expression}. Enter
 | |
|     the expression to evaluate and click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-inspector-add-watch.png "Add Watch Expression dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To stop watching a expression, right-click it and select \gui {Stop Watching}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The QML inspector cannot show the values for some items, such as composite objects
 | |
|     or complicated item that you cannot change. These items cannot be watched.
 | |
|     To show them, right-click the properties list, and then select
 | |
|     \gui {Show Unwatchable Properties}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Executing JavaScript
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui {Script Console} view, you can write JavaScript expressions, see
 | |
|     how they are executed, and evaluate them during runtime.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can also test the C++ code without rebuilding the whole application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Connections to \QQV
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui Output view displays the status of the connection between the QML
 | |
|     inspector and \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You specify the connection in the \gui {Run Settings} in the \gui Projects mode.
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Specifying Run Settings for Qt Quick Projects}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If the connection does not work, check the values of the \gui {Debugging address}
 | |
|     and \gui {Debugging port} fields. Check that the default port number is not reserved
 | |
|     by another application or another instance of \QQV that was not shut
 | |
|     down properly. You can specify any free port number in the registered port range
 | |
|     (1024-49151).
 | |
|     \endif
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-cpp.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-example.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging Qt Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui Debug mode you can interact with the debugger in several ways, including
 | |
|     the following:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Go through a program line-by-line or instruction-by-instruction.
 | |
|         \o Interrupt running programs.
 | |
|         \o Set breakpoints.
 | |
|         \o Examine the contents of the call stack.
 | |
|         \o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
 | |
|            the debugged program.
 | |
|         \o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
 | |
|            local and global variables.
 | |
|         \o Examine the list of loaded shared libraries.
 | |
|         \o Create snapshots of the current state of the debugged program
 | |
|            and re-examine them later.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator displays the raw information provided by the native debuggers
 | |
|     in a clear and concise manner with the goal to simplify the debugging process
 | |
|     as much as possible without losing the power of the native debuggers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In addition to the generic IDE functionality provided by stack view, views for
 | |
|     locals and watchers, registers, and so on, Qt Creator includes
 | |
|     features to make debugging Qt-based applications easy. The debugger
 | |
|     plugin understands the internal layout of several Qt classes, for
 | |
|     example, QString, the Qt containers, and most importantly QObject
 | |
|     (and classes derived from it), as well as most containers of the C++
 | |
|     Standard Library and some gcc and Symbian extensions. This
 | |
|     deeper understanding is used to present objects of such classes in
 | |
|     a useful way.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For an example of how to debug applications in the \gui Debug mode, see
 | |
|     \l{Debugging the Example Application}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about the functions available in the \gui Debug mode,
 | |
|     see \l{Interacting with the Debugger}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you install Qt Creator as part of a Qt SDK, the GNU Symbolic Debugger
 | |
|     is installed automatically and you should be ready to start debugging after
 | |
|     you create a new
 | |
|     project. If you want a special setup, such as using debugging tools for Windows,
 | |
|     see \l {Setting Up Debugger}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Modes of Operation
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger plugin runs in different operating modes depending on where and
 | |
|     how the process is started and run. Some of the modes are only available for
 | |
|     a particular operating system or platform.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can launch the debugger in the following modes:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Plain to debug locally started applications, such as a
 | |
|         Qt based GUI application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Terminal to debug locally started processes that need a
 | |
|        console, typically without a GUI.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Attach to debug local processes started outside Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Remote to debug a process running on a different machine.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Core to debug crashed processes on Unix.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold Post-mortem to debug crashed processes on Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o \bold TRK to debug processes running on a Symbian device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you click the \gui {Start Debugging} button, the debugger is launched
 | |
|     in the appropriate operating mode (plain, terminal, or TRK), based on the
 | |
|     build and run settings for the active project. Select \gui Debug menu options
 | |
|     to launch the debugger in the other modes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Plain Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the plain mode, click the \gui {Start Debugging}
 | |
|     button for the active project, or choose
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Debug External Application...}
 | |
|     and specify an executable.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Terminal Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the terminal mode, select \gui {Projects > Run Settings}
 | |
|     and select the \gui {Run in terminal} check box. Then click the
 | |
|     \gui {Start Debugging} button for the active project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Attach Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the attach mode, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging >  Attach to Running External Application...},
 | |
|     and then select a process by its name or process ID to attach to.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Remote Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The remote mode uses a \e{gdbserver} daemon that runs on the remote machine.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the remote mode, select
 | |
|     \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Attach to Remote Application...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Core Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The core mode is available only in Unix. It debugs crashed processes using
 | |
|     the \e {core} files (crash dumps) that are generated if the setting
 | |
|     is enabled in the shell.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable the dumping of core files, enter the following command in the
 | |
|     shell from which the application will be launched:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     ulimit -c unlimited
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the core mode, select
 | |
|     \gui{Debug > Start Debugging >  Attach to Core...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Post-Mortem Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The post-mortem mode is available only on Windows, if you have installed
 | |
|     the debugging tools for Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Qt Creator installation program asks you whether you want to
 | |
|     register Qt Creator as a post-mortem debugger. To change the setting, select
 | |
|     \gui{Tools > Options...  > Debugger > Common > Use Creator for post-mortem debugging}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can launch the debugger in the post-mortem mode if an application crashes
 | |
|     on Windows. Click the \gui {Debug in Qt Creator} button in the error message
 | |
|     that is displayed by the Windows operating system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 TRK Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The TRK mode is a special mode available only for Symbian. It
 | |
|     debugs processes running on a Symbian
 | |
|     device using the App TRK application that runs on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To launch the debugger in the TRK mode, open the project, select Symbian as the
 | |
|     target, and click the \gui {Start Debugging} button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on setting up Symbian projects, see
 | |
|     \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debug-mode.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugger-engines.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-helpers.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Typically, the interaction between Qt Creator and the native debugger is set
 | |
|     up automatically and you do not need to do anything. However, you might have an
 | |
|     unsupported gdb version installed, your Linux environment might not have gdb
 | |
|     installed at all, or you might want to use the debugging tools for Windows.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note To use the debugging tools for Windows, you must install them and add the
 | |
|     Symbol Server provided by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger.
 | |
|     For more information, see \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section explains the
 | |
|     options you have for debugging C++ code and provides installation notes for the
 | |
|     supported native debuggers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Supported Native Debugger Versions
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger plugin supports different builds of the gdb debugger, both
 | |
|     with and without the ability to use Python scripting. The Python enabled
 | |
|     versions are preferred, but they are not available on Mac and on older
 | |
|     versions of Linux.
 | |
|     On Windows, Symbian, and Maemo, only the Python version is supported.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The non-Python versions use the compiled version of the debugging helpers,
 | |
|     that you must enable separately. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Debugging Helper Library with C++}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Python version uses a script version of the debugging helpers
 | |
|     that does not need any special setup.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The CDB native debugger has similar funtionality to the non-Python gdb debugger
 | |
|     engine. Specifically, it also uses compiled C++ code for the debugging
 | |
|     helper library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the support for debugging C++ code:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Platform
 | |
|             \o Compiler
 | |
|             \o Native Debugger
 | |
|             \o Python
 | |
|             \o Debugger Modes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Linux
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Optional
 | |
|             \o Term, Plain, Attach (with Python, only), Remote
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Unix
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Term, Plain, Attach, Remote
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Mac OS
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o No
 | |
|             \o Term, Plain, Attach
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Windows/MinGW
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o No
 | |
|             \o Term, Plain, Attach, Remote
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Windows/MSVC
 | |
|             \o Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler
 | |
|             \o Debugging Tools for Windows/CDB
 | |
|             \o Not applicable
 | |
|             \o Term, Plain, Attach, Post-Mortem
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Symbian
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o TRK
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Maemo
 | |
|             \o gcc
 | |
|             \o gdb
 | |
|             \o Yes
 | |
|             \o Remote
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \omit
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Gdb Adapter Modes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     [Advanced Topic]
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The gdb native debugger used internally by the debugger plugin runs in
 | |
|     different adapter modes to cope with the variety
 | |
|     of supported platforms and environments. All gdb adapters inherit from
 | |
|     AbstractGdbAdapter:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o PlainGdbAdapter debugs locally started GUI processes.
 | |
|        It is physically split into parts that are relevant only when Python is
 | |
|        available, parts relevant only when Python is not available, and mixed code.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o TermGdbAdapter debugs locally started processes that need a
 | |
|        console.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o AttachGdbAdapter debugs local processes started outside Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o CoreGdbAdapter debugs core files generated from crashes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o RemoteGdbAdapter interacts with the gdbserver running on Linux.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o TrkGdbAdapter interacts with Symbian devices. The gdb protocol and
 | |
|        the gdb serial protocol are used between gdb and the adapter. The TRK
 | |
|        protocol is used between the adapter and AppTRK running on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \endomit
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Installing Native Debuggers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     There are various reasons why the debugger plugin may fail to automatically
 | |
|     pick up a suitable native debugger. The native debugger might be missing
 | |
|     (which is usually the case for the CDB debugger on Windows which always
 | |
|     needs to be installed manually by the user) or the installed version is not
 | |
|     supported.
 | |
|     Check the table below for the supported versions and other important
 | |
|     information about installing native debuggers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Native Debugger
 | |
|             \o Notes
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Gdb
 | |
|             \o On Linux, install version 6.8, 7.0.1 (version 7.0 is not supported),
 | |
|             7.1, or later. On Mac OS X, install Apple gdb version 6.3.50-20050815
 | |
|             (build 1344) or later.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Debugging tools for Windows
 | |
|             \o Using this engine requires you to install the
 | |
|                \e{Debugging tools for Windows}
 | |
|                \l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/installx86.Mspx}{32-bit}
 | |
|                or
 | |
|                \l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/install64bit.Mspx}{64-bit}
 | |
|                package (Version 6.11.1.404 for the 32-bit or the 64-bit version of Qt Creator, respectively),
 | |
|                which is freely available for download from the
 | |
|                \l{http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/default.aspx}
 | |
|                {Microsoft Developer Network}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                \note Visual Studio does not include the Debugging tools needed,
 | |
|                and therefore, you must install them separately.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                The pre-built \e{Qt SDK for Windows} makes use
 | |
|                of the library if it is present on the system. When manually building Qt
 | |
|                Creator using the Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler, the build process checks
 | |
|                for the required files in \c{"%ProgramFiles%\Debugging Tools for Windows"}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                It is highly recommended that you add the Symbol Server provided by Microsoft to the symbol
 | |
|                search path of the debugger. The Symbol Server provides you
 | |
|                with debugging informaton for the operating system libraries for debugging
 | |
|                Windows applications. For more information, see
 | |
|                \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \row
 | |
|            \o Debugging tools for Mac OS X
 | |
|            \o The Qt binary distribution contains both debug and release
 | |
|               variants of the libraries. But you have to explicitly tell the
 | |
|               runtime linker that you want to use the debug libraries even if
 | |
|               your application is compiled as debug as release is the default
 | |
|               library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|               If you use a qmake based project in Qt Creator,  you can set a
 | |
|               flag in your run configuration, in \gui Projects mode. In the run
 | |
|               configuration, select \gui{Use debug version of frameworks}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|               For more detailed information about debugging on the Mac, see:
 | |
|               \l http://developer.apple.com/mac/library/technotes/tn2004/tn2124.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note The Mac OS X Snow Leopard (10.6) has a bug, that can be worked
 | |
|               around as described in the link provided below:
 | |
|               \l http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTBUG-4962.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable    
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting the Symbol Server in Windows
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To obtain debugging information for the operating system libraries for
 | |
|     debugging Windows applications, add the Symbol Server provided
 | |
|     by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o  Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui Debugger > \gui Cdb.
 | |
|         \o  In the \gui {Symbol paths} field, open the \gui{Insert...} menu
 | |
|             and select \gui{Symbol Server...}.
 | |
|         \o  Select a directory where you want to store the cached information
 | |
|             and click \gui OK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             Use a subfolder in a temporary directory, such as
 | |
|             \c {C:\temp\symbolcache}.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Populating the cache might take a long time on a slow network
 | |
|     connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The first time you start debugging by using the
 | |
|     Debugging tools for Windows, Qt Creator prompts you to add the Symbol
 | |
|     Server.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-example.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debug-mode.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugger-engines.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Interacting with the Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In \gui Debug mode, you can use several views to interact with the
 | |
|     program you are debugging. Frequently used views are shown by
 | |
|     default and rarely used ones are hidden. To change the default settings,
 | |
|     select \gui Debug > \gui Views, and then select views to display
 | |
|     or hide. You can also lock views. The position of views is saved for future
 | |
|     sessions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debugger-views.png "Debug mode views"
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting the Debugger
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To start a program under the debugger's control, select \gui{Debug} >
 | |
|     \gui{Start Debugging} > \gui{Start Debugging}, or press \key{F5}.
 | |
|     Qt Creator checks whether the compiled program is up-to-date, rebuilding
 | |
|     it if necessary. The debugger then takes over and starts the program.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Starting a program in the debugger can take a considerable amount of
 | |
|     time, typically in the range of several seconds to minutes if complex
 | |
|     features (like QtWebKit) are used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once the program starts running, it behaves and performs as usual.
 | |
|     You can interrupt a running program by selecting \gui{Debug} >
 | |
|     \gui {Interrupt}. The program is automatically interrupted as soon as a
 | |
|     breakpoint is hit.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Once the program stops, Qt Creator:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Retrieves data representing the call stack at the program's current
 | |
|            position.
 | |
|         \o Retrieves the contents of local variables.
 | |
|         \o Examines \gui Watchers.
 | |
|         \o Updates the \gui Registers, \gui Modules, and \gui Disassembler
 | |
|            views.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \gui Debug mode views to examine the data in more detail.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the following keyboard shortcuts:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o To finish debugging, press \key{Shift+F5}.
 | |
|        \o  To execute a line of code as a whole, press \key{F10}.
 | |
|        \o  To step into a function or a sub-function, press \key{F11}.
 | |
|        \o  To continue running the program, press \key{F5}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     It is also possible to continue executing the program until the current
 | |
|     function completes or jump to an arbitrary position in the current function.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Breakpoints
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A breakpoint represents a position or sets of positions in the code that,
 | |
|     when executed, interrupts the program being debugged and passes the control
 | |
|     to you. You can then examine the state of the interrupted program, or
 | |
|     continue execution either line-by-line or continuously.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator shows breakpoints in the \gui{Breakpoints} view which is enabled
 | |
|     by default. The \gui{Breakpoints} view is also accessible when the debugger
 | |
|     and the program being debugged is not running.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debug-breakpoints.png "Breakpoints view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Typically, breakpoints are associated with a source code file and line, or
 | |
|     the start of a function -- both are allowed in Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The interruption of a program by a breakpoint can be restricted with
 | |
|     certain conditions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To set a breakpoint:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o At a particular line you want the program to stop, click the
 | |
|           left margin or press \key F9 (\key F8 for Mac OS X).
 | |
|        \o At a function that you want the program to interrupt, enter the
 | |
|           function's name in \gui{Set Breakpoint at Function...} located in the
 | |
|           context menu of the \gui{Breakpoints} view.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note You can remove a breakpoint:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o By clicking the breakpoint marker in the text editor.
 | |
|         \o By selecting the breakpoint in the breakpoint view and pressing
 | |
|            \key{Delete}.
 | |
|         \o By selecting \gui{Delete Breakpoint} from the context
 | |
|            menu in the \gui Breakpoints view.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can set and delete breakpoints before the program starts running or
 | |
|     while it is running under the debugger's control. Breakpoints are saved
 | |
|     together with a session.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Call Stack Trace
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the program being debugged is interrupted, Qt Creator displays the
 | |
|     nested function calls leading to the current position as a call stack
 | |
|     trace. This stack trace is built up from call stack frames, each
 | |
|     representing a particular function. For each function, Qt Creator tries
 | |
|     to retrieve the file name and line number of the corresponding source
 | |
|     file. This data is shown in the \gui Stack view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debug-stack.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Since the call stack leading to the current position may originate or go
 | |
|     through code for which no debug information is available, not all stack
 | |
|     frames have corresponding source locations. Stack frames without
 | |
|     corresponding source locations are grayed out in the \gui{Stack} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you click a frame with a known source location, the text editor
 | |
|     jumps to the corresponding location and updates the \gui{Locals and Watchers}
 | |
|     view, making it seem like the program was interrupted before entering the
 | |
|     function.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Threads
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If a multi-threaded program is interrupted, the \gui Thread view or the
 | |
|     combobox named \gui Thread in the debugger's status bar can be used to
 | |
|     switch from one thread to another. The \gui Stack view adjusts itself
 | |
|     accordingly.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Modules and Source Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Modules} view and \gui{Source Files} views display information
 | |
|     that the debugger plugin has about modules and source files included in
 | |
|     the project. The \gui{Modules} view lists the modules in the project and
 | |
|     symbols within the modules. In addition, it indicates where the module
 | |
|     was loaded.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Source Files} view lists all the source files included in the project.
 | |
|     If you cannot step into an instruction, you can check whether the source file is
 | |
|     actually part of the project, or whether it was compiled
 | |
|     elsewhere. The view shows the path to each file in the file system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, the \gui{Modules} view and \gui{Source Files} view are hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Viewing Disassembled Code and Register State
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Disassembler} view displays disassembled code for the current
 | |
|     function. The \gui{Registers} view displays the current state of the CPU's
 | |
|     registers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Disassembler} view and the \gui{Registers} view are both useful
 | |
|     for low-level commands for checking single instructions, such as \gui{Step Into}
 | |
|     and \gui{Step Over}. By default, both \gui{Disassembler} and
 | |
|     \gui{Registers} view are hidden.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Locals and Watchers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Whenever a program stops under the control of the debugger, it retrieves
 | |
|     information about the topmost stack frame and displays it in the
 | |
|     \gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view
 | |
|     typically includes information about parameters of the function in that
 | |
|     frame as well as the local variables.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-watcher.png "Locals and Watchers view"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Compound variables of struct or class type are displayed as
 | |
|     expandable in the view. Expand entries to show
 | |
|     all members. Together with the display of value and type, you can
 | |
|     examine and traverse the low-level layout of object data.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  \bold{Note:}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  Gdb, and therefore Qt Creator's debugger works for optimized
 | |
|                 builds on Linux and Mac OS X. Optimization can lead to
 | |
|                 re-ordering of instructions or removal of some local variables,
 | |
|                 causing the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to show unexpected
 | |
|                 data.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \i  The debug information provided by gcc does not include enough
 | |
|                 information about the time when a variable is initialized.
 | |
|                 Therefore, Qt Creator can not tell whether the contents of a
 | |
|                 local variable contains "real data", or "initial noise". If a
 | |
|                 QObject appears uninitialized, its value is reported as
 | |
|                 \gui {not in scope}. Not all uninitialized objects, however, can be
 | |
|                 recognized as such.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view also provides access to the most
 | |
|     powerful feature of the debugger: comprehensive display of data belonging
 | |
|     to Qt's basic objects.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable Qt's basic objects data display feature:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  Select \gui Tools > \gui {Options...} > \gui Debugger >
 | |
|            \gui{Debugging Helper} and check the \gui{Use Debugging Helper}
 | |
|            checkbox.
 | |
|        \o  The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view is reorganized to provide a
 | |
|            high-level view of the objects.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, in case of QObject, instead of displaying a pointer to some
 | |
|     private data structure, you see a list of children, signals and slots.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Similarly, instead of displaying many pointers and integers, Qt Creator's
 | |
|     debugger displays the contents of a QHash or QMap in an orderly manner.
 | |
|     Also, the debugger displays access data for QFileInfo and provides
 | |
|     access to the "real" contents of QVariant.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to change the contents of
 | |
|     variables of simple data types, for example, \c int or \c float when the
 | |
|     program is interrupted. To do so, click the \gui Value column, modify
 | |
|     the value with the inplace editor, and press \key Enter (or \key Return).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The set of watched items is saved in your session.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugging-cpp.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-example.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debug-mode.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Debugging the Example Application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section uses the \l{Creating a Qt C++ Application}{TextFinder} example to
 | |
|     illustrate how to debug applications in the \gui Debug mode. TextFinder
 | |
|     reads a text file into
 | |
|     QString and then displays it with QTextEdit.
 | |
|     To look at the example QString, \c{line}, and see the
 | |
|     stored data, place a breakpoint and view the QString object
 | |
|     data, as follows:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Click in between the line number and the window border on the line
 | |
|         where we invoke \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}
 | |
|         to set a breakpoint.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint1.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui{Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging} or press \key{F5}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To view the breakpoint, click the \gui{Breakpoints} tab.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint2.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To remove a breakpoint, right-click it and select \gui{Delete Breakpoint}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To view the contents of \c{line}, go to the \gui{Locals and
 | |
|     Watchers} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qtcreator-watcher.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Modify the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} function to move back to
 | |
|     the start of the document and continue searching once the cursor hits the
 | |
|     end of the document. Add the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     void TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()
 | |
|     {
 | |
|         QString searchString = ui->lineEdit->text();
 | |
| 
 | |
|         QTextDocument *document = ui->textEdit->document();
 | |
|         QTextCursor cursor = ui->textEdit->textCursor();
 | |
|         cursor = document->find(searchString, cursor,
 | |
|             QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
 | |
|         ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
 | |
| 
 | |
|         bool found = cursor.isNull();
 | |
| 
 | |
|         if (!found && previouslyFound) {
 | |
|             int ret = QMessageBox::question(this, tr("End of Document"),
 | |
|             tr("I have reached the end of the document. Would you like "
 | |
|             "me to start searching from the beginning of the document?"),
 | |
|             QMessageBox::Yes | QMessageBox::No, QMessageBox::Yes);
 | |
| 
 | |
|             if (ret == QMessageBox::Yes) {
 | |
|                 cursor = document->find(searchString,
 | |
|                     QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
 | |
|                 ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
 | |
|             } else
 | |
|                 return;
 | |
|         }
 | |
|         previouslyFound = found;
 | |
|     }
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you compile and run the above code, however, the application does not
 | |
|     work correctly due to a logic error. To locate this logic error, step
 | |
|     through the code using the following buttons:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-debugging-buttons.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|  */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-debugger-engines.html
 | |
|     \page creator-debugging-helpers.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging-qml.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using Debugging Helpers
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Helper Library with C++
 | |
| 
 | |
|     While debugging, Qt Creator dynamically loads a helper library into your
 | |
|     program. This helper library enables Qt Creator to pretty print Qt and STL
 | |
|     types. The Qt SDK package already contains a prebuilt debugging helper
 | |
|     library. To create your own debugging helper library, select \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{Qt Versions}. As the internal data
 | |
|     structures of Qt can change between versions, the debugging helper
 | |
|     library is built for each Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging Helper Library with Python
 | |
| 
 | |
|     With the gdb Python version, you can
 | |
|     use debugging helpers also for user defined types. To do so,
 | |
|     define one Python function per user defined type in \c{.gdbinit}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The function name has to be qdump__NS__Foo, where NS::Foo is the class
 | |
|     or class template to be examined. Nested namespaces are possible.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The debugger plugin calls this function whenever you want to
 | |
|     display an object of this type. The function is passed the following
 | |
|     parameters:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  \c d of type \c Dumper
 | |
|        \o  \c item of type \c Item
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The function has to feed the Dumper object with certain information
 | |
|     which is used to build up the object and its children's display in the
 | |
|     \gui{Locals and Watchers} view.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Example:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     def qdump__QVector(d, item):
 | |
|         d_ptr = item.value["d"]
 | |
|         p_ptr = item.value["p"]
 | |
|         alloc = d_ptr["alloc"]
 | |
|         size = d_ptr["size"]
 | |
| 
 | |
|         check(0 <= size and size <= alloc and alloc <= 1000 * 1000 * 1000)
 | |
|         check(d_ptr["ref"]["_q_value"] > 0)
 | |
| 
 | |
|         innerType = item.value.type.template_argument(0)
 | |
|         d.putItemCount(size)
 | |
|         d.putNumChild(size)
 | |
|         if d.isExpanded(item):
 | |
|             p = gdb.Value(p_ptr["array"]).cast(innerType.pointer())
 | |
|             with Children(d, [size, 2000], innerType)
 | |
|                 for i in d.childRange():
 | |
|                     d.putItem(Item(p.dereference(), item.iname, i))
 | |
|                     p += 1
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Item Class
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Item Python class is a thin wrapper around values corresponding to one
 | |
|     line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The Item members are as follows :
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{__init__(self, value, parentiname, iname, name = None)} - A
 | |
|        constructor. The object's internal name is created by concatenating
 | |
|        \c parentiname and \c iname. If \c None is passed as \c name, a
 | |
|        serial number is used.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{value} - An object of type gdb.Value representing the value to
 | |
|         be displayed.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{iname} - The internal name of the object, constituting a dot-separated
 | |
|     list of identifiers, corresponding to the position of the object's
 | |
|     representation in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{name} - An optional name. If given, is used in the
 | |
|     \gui{name} column of the view. If not, a simple number in brackets
 | |
|     is used instead.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Dumper Class
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For each line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, a string like the
 | |
|     following needs to be created and channeled to the debugger plugin.
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     "{iname='some internal name',
 | |
|       addr='object address in memory',
 | |
|       name='contents of the name column',
 | |
|       value='contents of the value column',
 | |
|       type='contents of the type column',
 | |
|       numchild='number of children',        // zero/nonzero is sufficient
 | |
|       childtype='default type of children', // optional
 | |
|       childnumchild='default number of grandchildren', // optional
 | |
|       children=[              // only needed if item is expanded in view
 | |
|          {iname='internal name of first child',
 | |
|           ... },
 | |
|          {iname='internal name of second child',
 | |
|           ... },
 | |
|          ...
 | |
|       ]}"
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     While in theory, you can build up the entire string above manually, it is
 | |
|     easier to employ the Dumper Python class for that purpose. The Dumper
 | |
|     Python class contains a complete framework to take care of the \c iname and
 | |
|     \c addr fields, to handle children of simple types, references, pointers,
 | |
|     enums, known and unknown structs as well as some convenience methods to
 | |
|     handle common situations.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Dumper members are the following:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{__init__(self)} - Initializes the output to an empty string and
 | |
|         empties the child stack.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{put(self, value)} - Low level method to directly append to the
 | |
|         output string.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putCommaIfNeeded(self)} - Appends a comma if the current output
 | |
|         ends in '}', '"' or ']' .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putField(self, name, value)} - Appends a comma if needed, and a
 | |
|          name='value' field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{beginItem(self, name)} - Starts writing a field by writing \c {name='}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{endItem(self)} - Ends writing a field by writing \c {'}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{endChildren(self)} - Ends writing a list of children.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{childRange(self)} - Returns the range of children specified in
 | |
|         the current \c Children scope.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putItemCount(self, count)} - Appends a field  \c {value='<%d items'}
 | |
|         to the output.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putEllipsis(self)} - Appends fields
 | |
|         \c {'{name="<incomplete>",value="",type="",numchild="0"}'}. This is
 | |
|         automatically done by \c endChildren if the number of children to
 | |
|         print is smaller than the number of actual children.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putName(self, name)} - Appends a \c {name='...'} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putType(self, type)} - Appends a field \c {type='...'} unless the
 | |
|         \a type coincides with the parent's default child type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putNumChild(self, numchild)} - Appends a field \c {numchild='...'}
 | |
|         unless the \c numchild coincides with the parent's default child numchild
 | |
|         value.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putValue(self, value, encoding = None)} - Append a file \c {value='...'},
 | |
|         optionally followed by a field \c {valueencoding='...'}. The \c value
 | |
|         needs to be convertible to a string entirely consisting of
 | |
|         alphanumerical values. The \c encoding parameter can be used to
 | |
|         specify the encoding in case the real value had to be encoded in some
 | |
|         way to meet the alphanumerical-only requirement.
 | |
|         Currently the following encodings are supported:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|             \o 0: unencoded 8 bit data, interpreted as Latin1.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 1: base64 encoded 8 bit data, used for QByteArray,
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 2: base64 encoded 16 bit data, used for QString,
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 3: base64 encoded 32 bit data,
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 4: base64 encoded 16 bit data, without quotes (see 2)
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 5: base64 encoded 8 bit data, without quotes (see 1)
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 6: %02x encoded 8 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o 7: %04x encoded 16 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
 | |
|                 double quotes are added.
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putStringValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QString and calls
 | |
|         \c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putByteArrayValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QByteArray and calls
 | |
|         \c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{isExpanded(self, item)} - Checks whether the item with the
 | |
|         internal name \c item.iname is expanded in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{isExpandedIName(self, iname)} - Checks whether the item with the
 | |
|         internal name \c iname is expanded in the view.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{putIntItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         self.beginHash()
 | |
|         self.putName(name)
 | |
|         self.putValue(value)
 | |
|         self.putType("int")
 | |
|         self.putNumChild(0)
 | |
|         self.endHash()
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \gui{putBoolItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         self.beginHash()
 | |
|         self.putName(name)
 | |
|         self.putValue(value)
 | |
|         self.putType("bool")
 | |
|         self.putNumChild(0)
 | |
|         self.endHash()
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{pushOutput(self)} - Moves the output string to a safe location
 | |
|         from with it is sent to the debugger plugin even if further operations
 | |
|         raise an exception.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putCallItem(self, name, item, func)} -
 | |
|         Uses gdb to call the function \c func on the value specified by
 | |
|         \a {item.value} and output the resulting item. This function is
 | |
|         not available when debugging core dumps and it is not available
 | |
|         on the Symbian platform due to restrictions imposed by AppTRK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putItemHelper(self, item)} - The "master function", handling
 | |
|         basic types, references, pointers and enums directly, iterates
 | |
|         over base classes and class members of compound types and calls
 | |
|         \c qdump__* functions whenever appropriate.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o \gui{putItem(self, item)} - Equivalent to:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|         with SubItem(self):
 | |
|             self.putItemHelper(item)
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
|         Exceptions raised by nested function calls are caught and all
 | |
|         output produced by \c putItemHelper is replaced by the output of:
 | |
|         \code
 | |
|             ...
 | |
|         except RuntimeError:
 | |
|             d.put('value="<invalid>",type="<unknown>",numchild="0",')
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Children and SubItem Class
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The attempt to create child items might lead to errors if data is
 | |
|     uninitialized or corrupted. To gracefully recover in such situations,
 | |
|     use \c Children and \c SubItem \e{Context Managers} to create the nested items.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \c Children constructor \gui{__init__(self, dumper, numChild = 1,
 | |
|     childType = None, childNumChild = None)} uses one mandatory argument and three
 | |
|     optional arguments.  The mandatory argument refers to the current \c Dumper
 | |
|     object.  The optional arguments can be used to specify the number \c numChild
 | |
|     of children, with type \c childType_ and \c childNumChild_ grandchildren each.
 | |
|     If \c numChild_ is a list of two integers, the first one specifies the actual
 | |
|     number of children and the second the maximum number of children to print.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Similarly, using the \c SubItem class helps to protect individual items.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Example:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     d.putNumChild(2)
 | |
|     if d.isExpanded(item):
 | |
|         with Children(d):
 | |
|             with SubItem(d):
 | |
|                 d.putName("key")
 | |
|                 d.putItemHelper(Item(key, item.iname, "key"))
 | |
|             with SubItem(d):
 | |
|                 d.putName("value")
 | |
|                 d.putItemHelper(Item(value, item.iname, "value"))
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-qmake.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-cmake.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-generic.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up a CMake Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     CMake is an alternative to qmake for automating the generation of makefiles.
 | |
|     It controls the software compilation process by using simple configuration
 | |
|     files, called CMakeLists.txt files. CMake generates native makefiles and
 | |
|     workspaces that you can use in the compiler environment of your choice.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Since Qt Creator 1.1, CMake configuration files are supported.
 | |
|     Qt Creator 1.3 supports the Microsoft Toolchain if the CMake version
 | |
|     is at least 2.8.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting the Path for CMake
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can set the path for the \c CMake executable in \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options... > Projects > CMake}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmakeexecutable.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Before you open a \c CMake project it is necessary to modify the
 | |
|     \c{PATH} environment variable to include the bin folders of \c mingw and
 | |
|     Qt Creator in the SDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For instance, if you have the Qt Creator SDK installed in your C drive,
 | |
|     use the following command to set the environment variables in
 | |
|     the command line prompt:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     set PATH=C:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;C:\qtsdk\qt\bin;
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
|     Then start Qt Creator by typing:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     C:\qtsdk\bin\qtcreator.exe
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Opening CMake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To open a \c CMake project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o  Select \gui{File} > \gui{Open File or Project...}.
 | |
|         \o  Select the \c{CMakeLists.txt} file from your \c CMake project.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A wizard guides you through the rest of the process.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If the \c CMake project does not have an in-place build, Qt Creator
 | |
|     lets you specify the directory in which the project is built
 | |
|    (\l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow build}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard1.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The screenshot below shows how you can specify command line arguments to
 | |
|     \c CMake for your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard2.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Normally, there is no need to pass any command line arguments for projects
 | |
|     that are already built, as \c CMake caches that information.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Building CMake Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator builds \c CMake projects by running \c make, \c mingw32-make, or
 | |
|     \c nmake depending on your platform. The build errors and warnings are
 | |
|     parsed and displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} output pane.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, Qt Creator builds the \bold{all} target. You can specify which
 | |
|     targets to build in \gui{Project} mode, under \gui{Build Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-cmake-build-settings.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator supports multiple build configurations. The build
 | |
|     directory can also be modified after the initial import.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running CMake Projects
 | |
|     Qt Creator automatically adds \gui{Run Configurations} for all targets
 | |
|     specified in the \c CMake project file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Known issues for the current version can be found
 | |
|     \l{Known Issues}{here}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding External Libraries to a CMake Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
 | |
|     syntax highlighting as if they were part of the current project or the Qt
 | |
|     library.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator detects the external libraries using the \c FIND_PACKAGE()
 | |
|     macro. Some libraries come with the CMake installation. You can find those
 | |
|     in the \bold{Modules} directory of your CMake installation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you provide your own libraries, you also need to provide your own
 | |
|     \c FindFoo.cmake file. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://vtk.org/Wiki/CMake_FAQ#Writing_FindXXX.cmake_files}{CMake FAQ}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Syntax completion and highlighting work once your project successfully
 | |
|     builds and links against the external library.
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-cmake.html
 | |
|     \page creator-project-generic.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-developing-maemo.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up a Generic Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator supports generic projects, so you can import existing projects
 | |
|     that do not use qmake or CMake and Qt Creator ignores your build system.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Generic project support allows you to use Qt Creator as a code editor. You
 | |
|     can change the way your project is built by modifying the \c make command
 | |
|     in the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Build Settings}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you import a project, Qt Creator creates the following files that
 | |
|     allow you to specify which files belong to your project and which include
 | |
|     directories or defines you want to pass to your compile:
 | |
|     \tt{.files}, \tt{.includes}, and \tt{.config}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Importing a Generic Project
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To import an existing generic project:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project...} >
 | |
|            \gui{Other Project} > \gui{Import Existing Project}.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{Import Existing Project}, enter the project name
 | |
|            and select the location of the project file you want to import.
 | |
| 
 | |
|            Qt Creator automatically generates the following files in the
 | |
|            project directory:
 | |
|            \list
 | |
|                \o \l{Specifying Files}{.files}
 | |
|                \o \l{Specifying Include Paths}{.includes}
 | |
|                \o \l{Specifying Defines}{.config}
 | |
|                \o .creator
 | |
|            \endlist
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When the project is successfully imported, Qt Creator creates the project
 | |
|     tree in the sidebar.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     After importing a generic project into Qt Creator, open it by selecting the
 | |
|     \tt{.creator} file.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Working with Generic Project Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For a generic project, you have to manually specify which files belong to
 | |
|     your project and which include directories or defines you want to pass to
 | |
|     your compiler.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The list of files for a generic project is specified in the \tt{.files}
 | |
|     file. When you first create a generic project, Qt Creator adds any
 | |
|     files it recognizes to your project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add or remove files, edit the \tt{.files} file in Qt Creator.
 | |
|     Qt Creator recreates your project tree when you save the \tt{.files} file.
 | |
|     Alternatively, you can add and remove files using the context menu in the
 | |
|     project tree.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you frequently need to update the \tt{.files} file, you can do so
 | |
|     efficiently by using a script that updates the file for you. If the file
 | |
|     is modified externally, you have to restart Qt Creator for the changes to
 | |
|     take effect.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To update the \tt{.files} on the \gui Git repository use the following
 | |
|     script:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     git ls-files *.cpp *.h > MyProject.files
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Include Paths
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The include paths are specified in the \tt{.includes} file, one include
 | |
|     path per line. The paths can be either absolute or relative to the
 | |
|     \tt{.includes} file.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Specifying Defines
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The defines are specified in the \tt{.config} file. The \tt{.config} file is
 | |
|     a regular C++ file, prepended to all your source files when they are parsed.
 | |
|     Only use the \tt{.config} file to add lines as in the example below:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     #define NAME value
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating a Run Configuration
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator cannot automatically determine which executable to run.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Run Settings}, define the executable
 | |
|     file to run:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Add and select \gui{Custom Executable}.
 | |
|         \o Define the configuration name, the location of the executable, any
 | |
|            additional arguments and the working directory.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-build-dependencies.html
 | |
|     \page creator-visual-editor.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-usability.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Developing Qt Quick Applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can either create Qt Quick projects from scratch or import them to
 | |
|     Qt Creator. For example, you can import and run the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativeexamples.html} {QML examples and demos}
 | |
|     to learn how to use various aspects of QML.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The Qt Quick specific features and the QDeclarative help are based on a
 | |
|     preview version of the QtDeclarative package. Update Qt Creator when Qt 4.7 is
 | |
|     released.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the code editor (\gui Edit mode) or the visual editor
 | |
|     (\gui Design mode) to develop Qt Quick applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The \QMLD visual editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
 | |
|     enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
 | |
|     visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To enable or disable the \QMLD visual editor, select
 | |
|     \gui {Help > About Plugins... > Qt Quick > QmlDesigner}. You must restart Qt Creator
 | |
|     to enable or disable the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Creating Qt Quick Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt QML Application}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \QMLD creates the following files:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o .qmlproject project file defines that all QML, JavaScript, and image
 | |
|     files in the project folder belong to the project. Therefore, you do not
 | |
|     need to individually list all the files in the project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o .qml file defines an element, such as a component, screen, or the whole
 | |
|     application UI.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \c import statement in the beginning of the .qml file specifies the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativemodules.html} {Qt modules}
 | |
|     to import to \QMLD. Each Qt module contains a set of default elements.
 | |
|     Specify a version to get the features you want.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use JavaScript and image files in the application, copy them to the
 | |
|     project folder.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To import a QML project to Qt Creator, select
 | |
|     \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Import Existing Qt QML Directory}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Designing Application UI
 | |
| 
 | |
|     One .qml file can define a component, screen, or the whole application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Components
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A QML component provides a way of defining a new type that you can re-use in other QML
 | |
|     files. A component is like a black box; it interacts with the outside world
 | |
|     through properties, signals, and slots, and is generally defined in its own QML file.
 | |
|     You can import components to screens and applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \gui Library items to create components. Drag and drop
 | |
|     the following QML elements to the editor and modify their properties in the \gui Properties pane:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|         uses an image as a border or background.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-image.html}{Image}
 | |
|         adds a bitmap to the scene. You can stretch and tile images.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-item.html}{Item}
 | |
|         is the most basic of all visual items in QML. Even though it has no visual appearance,
 | |
|         it defines all the properties that are common across visual items, such as the x and
 | |
|         y position, width and height, anchoring, and key handling.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-rectangle.html}{Rectangle}
 | |
|         adds a rectangle that is painted with a solid fill color and an optional border.
 | |
|         You can also use the radius property to create rounded rectangles.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-text.html}{Text}
 | |
|         adds formatted read-only text.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-textedit.html}{Text Edit}
 | |
|         adds a single line of editable formatted text that can be validated.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-textinput.html}{Text Input}
 | |
|         adds a single line of editable plain text that can be validated.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use QML to add properties for a component in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following sections describe some use cases for the QML elements.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Creating Buttons
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a button component:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt QML File} to create a QML file
 | |
|         called Button.qml (for example).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note Components are listed in the \gui Library pane only if the filename begins
 | |
|         with a capital letter.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui Rectangle from the \gui Library pane to the scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, modify the appearance of the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Color field, select the button color.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Radius field, use
 | |
|         the slider to set the radius of the rectangle and produce rounded corners for the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui {Text} item on top of the \gui Rectangle. This creates a
 | |
|         nested element where \gui Rectangle is the parent element of \gui Text. Elements
 | |
|         are positioned relative to their parents.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Properties pane, edit the properties of the \gui Text item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Text field, type \bold Button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         You can select the text color, font, size, and style in the \gui Font section.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Alignment field, select the center button to align the text to the
 | |
|         center of the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
 | |
|         \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|         button to anchor the text to the whole button area.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Edit to edit the \c width and \c height properties of the button
 | |
|         to fit the button size.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Press \key {Ctrl+S} to save the button.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \image qmldesigner-button.png "Button component"
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button to view the button in \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a graphical button that scales beautifully without using vector graphics,
 | |
|     use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|     element.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
 | |
|     element to display an image, such as a PNG file, as a border and a background.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use two Border Image elements and suitable graphics to make it look like the button
 | |
|     is pushed down when it is clicked. One of the Border Image elements is visible by default.
 | |
|     You can specify that it is hidden and the other one becomes visible when the mouse is clicked.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Add a MouseArea that covers the whole area and emits the clicked signal (\c {parent.clicked()})
 | |
|     when it detects a mouse click.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add text to the button and set it up as a property. The text can then be initialized
 | |
|     from the outside, making the button a reusable UI component. The font size is also available in case
 | |
|     the default size is too big. You can scale down the button text and use smooth text rendering
 | |
|     for some extra quality.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qmldesigner-borderimage.png "Graphical button"
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To create a graphical button:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt QML File} to create a QML file
 | |
|         called Button.qml (for example).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Replace the \gui Rectangle with an \gui Item, as illustrated by the
 | |
|         following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Item {
 | |
| 
 | |
|         }
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop two \gui BorderImage items from the \gui Library pane to
 | |
|         the scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui Text item to the scene.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Drag and drop a \gui MouseArea to the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click \gui Edit to specify properties for the \gui Item, as
 | |
|         illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         property string text: ""
 | |
|         property int fontSize: 44
 | |
| 
 | |
|         signal clicked
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui Navigator view, select \gui borderimage1 to specify
 | |
|         settings for it in the \gui Properties pane:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
 | |
|             button, for example button_up.png.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Left, \gui Right, \gui Top, and \gui Bottom fields,
 | |
|             enter 32 to set the margins for the image.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|             button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui Advanced, and select \gui {Set Expression} in the menu
 | |
|             next to the \gui Visibility check box.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Enter the following expression to specify that the image is visible
 | |
|             when the mouse is not pressed down: \c {!mousearea1.pressed}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui borderimage2 to specify similar settings for it:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
 | |
|             button when it is clicked, for example button_down.png.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Left, \gui Right, \gui Top, and \gui Bottom fields,
 | |
|             enter 32 to set the margins for the image.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
 | |
|             button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui Advanced, and set the following epression for
 | |
|             \gui Visibility, to specify that the the image is visible
 | |
|             when the mouse is pressed down: \c {mousearea1.pressed}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Text to specify font size and color, and text
 | |
|         scaling and rendering:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Color field, use the color picker to select
 | |
|             the font color, or enter a value in the field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Text field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
 | |
|             enter a pointer to the \c {text} property that you specified
 | |
|             earlier: \c {parent.txt}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Pixel} to specify
 | |
|             the font size in pixels. By default, the size is specified in
 | |
|             points.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
 | |
|             enter a pointer to the \c {fontSize} property that you specified
 | |
|             earlier.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select the \gui Smooth check box to enable smooth text
 | |
|             rendering.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
 | |
|             \inlineimage qmldesigner-center-in.png "Anchor buttons"
 | |
|             buttons to inherit the vertical and horizontal centering from
 | |
|             the parent.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui Advanced to specify scaling for the text in the
 | |
|             \gui Scale field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select \gui {Set Expression} and enter the following expression:
 | |
|             \c {if (!mousearea1.pressed) { 1 } else { 0.95 }}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \note You can enter long and complicated expressions also in the
 | |
|             code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the code editor, add to the \c MouseArea item
 | |
|         a pointer to the \c clicked expression that you added earlier:
 | |
|         \c {onClicked: parent.clicked()}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button to view the button in \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Creating Screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \gui Library items and your own components to create screens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can create the following types of views to organize items provided by
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativemodels.html}{data models}:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-gridview.html}{Grid View}
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-listview.html}{List View}
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-pathview.html}{Path View}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the code editor, write the code to use the data models.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use states and transitions
 | |
|     to navigate between screens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     QML states typically describe user interface configurations, such as the UI elements,
 | |
|     their properties and behavior and the available actions. For example, you can use
 | |
|     states to create two screens:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Use the \gui Library items, resources and your own components to create a screen.
 | |
|         For example, drag and drop the button component from the \gui Library pane to the screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In the \gui State pane, click the plus sign to add another view, or \e state
 | |
|         to the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Modify the second state of the screen to create a new screen.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section3 Creating List Views
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You use list views and list models to create lists. You use delegates to handle list items.
 | |
|     Typically, the list model is provided by a QAbstractListModel C++ model object,
 | |
|     but you can also create it in QML.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt QML File} to create a QML file
 | |
|         called ListView.qml (for example).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add a list model that contains the data to be shown on the list, as
 | |
|         illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         import Qt 4.7
 | |
| 
 | |
|             Rectangle {
 | |
|                 width: 360
 | |
|                 height: 640
 | |
| 
 | |
|             ListModel {
 | |
|                 id: myListModel
 | |
|                 ListElement {
 | |
|                    item_index: 0
 | |
|                    item_name: "Item 1"
 | |
|                    item_description: "Description 1"
 | |
|             }
 | |
|             ListElement {
 | |
|                 item_index: 1
 | |
|                 item_name: "Item 2"
 | |
|                 item_description: "Description 2"
 | |
|             }
 | |
|             ListElement {
 | |
|                 item_index: 2
 | |
|                 item_name: "Item 3"
 | |
|                 item_description: "Description 3"
 | |
|             }
 | |
|         }
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add a delegate that draws each item in the list.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Component {
 | |
|             id: myListDelegate
 | |
|             Item {
 | |
|                 id: wrapper
 | |
|                 width: parent.width
 | |
|                 height: 40
 | |
|                 Column {
 | |
|                     x: 5; y: 5
 | |
|                     Text { text: '<b>Name:</b> ' + item_name }
 | |
|                     Text { text: '<b>Descriptionr:</b> ' + item_description }
 | |
|                 }
 | |
|                 MouseArea {
 | |
|                     anchors.fill: parent
 | |
|                     onClicked: myList.currentIndex = item_index
 | |
|                 }
 | |
|             }
 | |
|         }
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         You can use a separate delegate to hilight the currently selected item.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Component {
 | |
|             id: myListHilight
 | |
|             Rectangle {
 | |
|                 width: parent.width
 | |
|                 height: 40
 | |
|                 color: "lightsteelblue"
 | |
|                 radius: 5
 | |
|                 SpringFollow on y {
 | |
|                     to: myList.currentItem.y
 | |
|                     spring: 3
 | |
|                     damping: 0.2
 | |
|                 }
 | |
|             }
 | |
|         }
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Add the list view, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \code
 | |
| 
 | |
|         ListView {
 | |
|             id: myList
 | |
|             width: parent.width; height: parent.height
 | |
|             model: myListModel
 | |
|             delegate: myListDelegate
 | |
|             highlight: myListHilight
 | |
|             focus: true
 | |
|             }
 | |
|         }
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Click the \gui Run button to view the list view in \QQV.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Navigating Between Screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To make movement between states smooth, you can specify transitions.
 | |
|     You can use different types of animated transitions. For example, you can animate changes
 | |
|     to property values and colors. You can use rotation animation to control the direction of
 | |
|     rotation. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativeanimation.html}{QML Animation}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can use the \c ParallelAnimation element to start several animations at the same time.
 | |
|     Or use the \c SequentialAnimation element to run them one after another.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Adding User Interaction Methods
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can add the following basic interaction methods to scenes:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-flickable.html}{Flickable}
 | |
|         items can be flicked horizontally or vertically.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-flipable.html}{Flipable}
 | |
|         items can be flipped between their front and back sides by using rotation,
 | |
|         state, and transition.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-focusscope.html}{Focus Scope}
 | |
|         assists in keyboard focus handling when building reusable QML components.
 | |
|         \o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-mousearea.html}{Mouse Area}
 | |
|         enables simple mouse handling.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To add interaction methods, drag and drop a \gui {Focus Scope} or \gui {Mouse Area}
 | |
|     to the screen. In the code editor, add signal handlers to execute when users select
 | |
|     the scope or area. Signal handlers allow actions to be taken in response to an event.
 | |
|     For instance, the \gui {MouseArea} element has signal handlers to handle mouse press,
 | |
|     release, and click.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Implementing Application Logic
 | |
| 
 | |
|     A user interface is only a part of an application, and not really useful by itself.
 | |
|     You can use Qt or JavaScript to implement the application logic. For more information on
 | |
|     using JavaScript, see
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativejavascript.html} {Integrating JavaScript}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For an example of how to use JavaScript to develop a game, see the
 | |
|     \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-advtutorial.html} {QML Advanced Tutorial}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|  */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-project-generic.html
 | |
|     \page creator-developing-maemo.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-developing-symbian.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Maemo is a software platform developed by Nokia for smartphones and
 | |
|     Internet Tablets. The Maemo SDK provides an open development environment
 | |
|     for different applications on top of the Maemo platform. The necessary
 | |
|     tools from the Maemo SDK are also included in the Nokia Qt SDK.
 | |
|     The whole tool chain that you need to create, build, debug, run, and deploy
 | |
|     Maemo applictions is installed and configured when you install the Nokia
 | |
|     Qt SDK.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Maemo 5 is based on the Linux 2.6 operating system. For more
 | |
|     information about the Maemo platform, see
 | |
|     \l{http://maemo.org/intro/platform/}{Software Platform} on the Maemo web site.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about developing applications for the Maemo 5
 | |
|     platform, select \gui {Help > Index} and look for \gui {Platform Notes},
 | |
|     or see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qt-maemo-4.6/platform-notes.html}{Platform Notes - Maemo 5}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Hardware and Software Requirements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To build and run Qt applications for Maemo, you need the following:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  Nokia N900 device with software update release 1.2 (V10.2010.19-1)
 | |
|        or later installed.
 | |
|        \o  MADDE cross-platform Maemo development
 | |
|            tool (installed as part of the Nokia Qt SDK).
 | |
| 
 | |
|            For more information about MADDE pertaining to its
 | |
|            installation, configuration, and deployment on the device, see
 | |
|           \l{http://wiki.maemo.org/MADDE}{Introduction to MADDE}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Nokia USB drivers.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Only needed if you develop on Windows and if you use a USB connection
 | |
|        to run applications on the device. The drivers are
 | |
|        installed as part of the Nokia Qt SDK. You can also download them from
 | |
|        \l{https://garage.maemo.org/frs/?group_id=801&release_id=2655}{PC Connectivity}
 | |
|        on the Maemo web site. Download and install the latest
 | |
|        PC_Connectivity_<version>.exe (at the time of writing,
 | |
|        PC_Connectivity_0.9.4.exe).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The Qt Creator/MADDE integration is supported on the following platforms:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  Linux (32 bit and 64 bit)
 | |
|        \o  Windows (32 bit and 64 bit)
 | |
|        \omit \o  Mac OS 10.5 Leopard, or higher \endomit
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note The only supported build system for Maemo in Qt
 | |
|     Creator is qmake.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up the Nokia N900
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can connect your device to your development PC using either a USB or
 | |
|     WLAN connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For the device, you need to use a tool called Mad Developer to create the
 | |
|     device-side end point for USB and WLAN connections. It provides no
 | |
|     diagnostics functions but is essential for creating connections between the
 | |
|     device and your development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use a WLAN connection, you must activate WLAN on the device and connect
 | |
|     it to the same WLAN as the development PC. The network address is displayed
 | |
|     in the Mad Developer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To use an USB connection, you need to set up the Nokia N900 as a network device
 | |
|     on the development PC.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you plan to connect your development PC to the Nokia N900 only over WLAN, you can
 | |
|     ignore the USB-specific parts in the following sections.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Installing and Configuring Mad Developer
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Install Mad Developer on a device and configure
 | |
|     a connection between the development PC and the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To install and configure Mad Developer:
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \list 1
 | |
|          \o On the Nokia N900, select \gui{Download} > \gui{Development} > \gui{mad-developer}
 | |
|          to install the Mad Developer software package.
 | |
|          \o Click \gui {Mad Developer} to start the Mad Developer application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \o To use a WLAN connection, activate WLAN on the device and connect
 | |
|          to the same network as the development PC. You can see the network
 | |
|          address in the \gui wlan0 field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \o To use an USB connection:
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \o If you are using Microsoft Windows as development host, you must
 | |
|          change the driver loaded for instantiating the connection.
 | |
|          In the Mad Developer, select \gui{Manage USB} and select \gui{Load g_ether}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \o To set up the USB settings, click \gui Edit on the \gui usb0 row and
 | |
|          confirm by clicking \gui Configure.
 | |
| 
 | |
|           \note By default, you do not need to make changes. The \gui usb0 row
 | |
|           displays the IP address 192.168.2.15.
 | |
| 
 | |
|           \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Select \gui{Developer Password} to generate a password for a freshly
 | |
|           created user called \bold developer. The password stays valid for as long
 | |
|           as the password generation dialog is open. You enter the password when
 | |
|           you configure the connection in Qt Creator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|           \image qtcreator-mad-developer-screenshot.png
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Installing Qt Mobility APIs
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To develop applications that use the Qt Mobility APIs, you must install the
 | |
|     APIs on the devices. The APIs are not available in the Nokia N900 package
 | |
|     manager, and therefore, you must install them from the command line as the
 | |
|     root user. To become the root user you must first install \c rootsh from the
 | |
|     application manager.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o On the device, install \c rootsh from the \gui {Application Manager}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In \gui Programs, select \c {X Terminal} to open a terminal window.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To switch to the root user, enter the following command:
 | |
|         \c{sudo gainroot}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To install Qt Mobility libraries, enter the following command:
 | |
|         \c{apt-get install libqtm-*}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To confirm the installation, enter: \c Y
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Close the terminal.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up Network Connectivity on Development PC
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Use the network configuration tools on your platform to specify the
 | |
|     connection to the device on the development PC. You need to do this
 | |
|     only if you use an USB connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Linux
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The device uses the IP address 192.168.2.15 with the subnet 255.255.255.0
 | |
|     for its USB connection by default, so you can create the network interface
 | |
|     with a different address inside the same subnet too.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you have changed the IP address of the device when configuring
 | |
|     Mad Developer, you need to reflect those changes in your development PC USB
 | |
|     network settings.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Run the following command in a shell as root user:
 | |
|                   \c{ifconfig usb0 192.168.2.14 up}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Windows
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you connect the device to your Windows PC, Windows tries to install a
 | |
|     driver for the Linux USB Ethernet connection. In the
 | |
|     \gui{Found New Hardware Wizard}, select \gui{No, not this time} in the
 | |
|     first dialog and \gui{Install the software automatically} in the second
 | |
|     dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To specify a network connection:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Open the Network Connections window.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Select the Linux USB Ethernet
 | |
|     connection that is displayed as a new Local Area Connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Edit the \gui {Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)} properties
 | |
|     to specify the IP address for the connection.
 | |
|     In the \gui {Use the following IP address} field, enter the following values:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|        \o  \gui {IP Address}: \bold {192.168.2.14}
 | |
|        \o  \gui SubnetMask: \bold {255.255.255.0}
 | |
|        \o  \gui {Default gateway}: leave this field empty
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Depending on
 | |
|     your version of Microsoft Windows you may have to unplug and re-plug the
 | |
|     Nokia N900 to reload the driver with its configuration accordingly.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Setting Up MADDE
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you install Nokia Qt SDK, the MADDE package is installed and
 | |
|     configured automatically on your development PC and you can omit this task.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Download the MADDE installer file for your platform from the
 | |
|     \l{http://wiki.maemo.org/MADDE}{MADDE} site.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Execute the installer and follow the instructions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To see which targets are available, run \c{mad-admin list targets}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o To install the target that starts with the string \bold fremantle, use the command:
 | |
|     \c{mad-admin create fremantle-qt-xxx}
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In Qt Creator, register the MADDE tool chain:
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \image qtcreator-screenshot-toolchain.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 > \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-windows-add.png,
 | |
|             to add a new Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             The \gui{qmake Location} is the qmake
 | |
|             executable in \c{<MADDE dir>/targets/<fremantle target>/bin}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you have installed the target, you have a toolchain and a sysroot
 | |
|     environment for cross-compiling.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Configuring Connections in Qt Creator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To be able to run and debug applications on the Maemo emulator and
 | |
|     devices, you must set up a connection to the emulator and the device in the
 | |
|     Qt Creator build and run settings. If you install Nokia Qt SDK, the
 | |
|     necessary software is installed and configured automatically and you
 | |
|     only need to configure a connection to the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     By default, you create the connection as the \e developer user. This
 | |
|     protects real user data on the device from getting corrupted during
 | |
|     testing. If you write applications that use Mobility APIs, you might want
 | |
|     to test them with real user data. To create a connection as a user, specify
 | |
|     the \gui Username and \gui Password in Qt Creator. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Testing with User Data}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can protect the connections between Qt Creator and the Maemo emulator
 | |
|     or a device by using either a password or an SSH key. You must always
 | |
|     use a password for the initial connection, but can then deploy an SSH
 | |
|     key and use it for subsequent connections. If you use a password, you
 | |
|     must generate it in Mad Developer and enter it in Qt Creator every time
 | |
|     you connect to the Maemo emulator or to a device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you do not have an SSH key, you can create it in Qt Creator.
 | |
|     Encrypted keys are not supported. For more
 | |
|     information, see \l{Generating SSH Keys}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To configure connections between Qt Creator and the Maemo emulator or
 | |
|     device:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o If you install the Maemo emulator (QEMU) separately, you must
 | |
|            specify parameters to access it:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Start Mad Developer in the emulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui {Developer Password} to generate a password for
 | |
|             the connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In Qt Creator, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Projects >
 | |
|             Maemo Device Configurations > Add} to add a new configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \image qtcreator-maemo-emulator-connection.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui {Configuration name} field, enter a name for
 | |
|             the connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui {Device type} field, select \gui {Maemo emulator}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui {Authentication type} field, select \gui Password
 | |
|             for the initial connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui Password field, enter the password from the Mad
 | |
|             Developer for the initial connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             You can use the default values for the other fields.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui Test to test the connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o To avoid having to specify the password every time you connect
 | |
|             to the Maemo emulator, click \gui {Deploy Key...} and select
 | |
|             the file that contains your public key.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o When you have deployed the key to the device, change the
 | |
|             configuration to use the SSH key for protection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \image qtcreator-maemo-emulator-connection-key.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|             The default location of the private key file is displayed in the
 | |
|             \gui {Private key file} field.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|             If you installed the Nokia Qt SDK, a connection has been configured
 | |
|             and you only need to specify the password and deploy the SSH key.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o  To deploy applications and run them remotely, specify parameters
 | |
|             for accessing devices:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Connect your device to the development PC via an USB cable or
 | |
|             a WLAN. For an USB connection, you are prompted to select the mode
 | |
|             to use. Choose \gui{PC suite mode}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \note If you experience connection problems due to a USB port issue,
 | |
|             switch to a different port or use WLAN to connect to the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Projects >
 | |
|             \gui{Maemo Device Configurations > Add}, and add a new configuration for a
 | |
|             \gui {Remote device}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \image qtcreator-screenshot-devconf.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o In the \gui {Host name} field, enter the IP address from the
 | |
|             \gui usb0 or \gui wlan0 field in Mad Developer.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Specify the other settings in the same way as for a Maemo emulator
 | |
|             connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui Test to test the connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \o Click \gui OK to close the dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \o To specify build and run settings:
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \list a
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o Open a project for an application you want to develop for your
 | |
|                 Nokia N900.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o Click \gui Projects to open the projects mode.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                 \o In the \gui{Build Settings} section, choose the MADDE Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                  \image qtcreator-screenshot-build-settings.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|                  \o In the \gui{Run Settings} section, click \gui Add to add a new
 | |
|                  run configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                  \o Set a name and select the device configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|                  \image qtcreator-screenshot-run-settings.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|                  \note You can either add separate run settings for both the Maemo
 | |
|                   emulator connection and the device connection or select the
 | |
|                   \gui {Device configuration} before you run the application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Testing with User Data
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To run your application as the default user, you must first assign a password
 | |
|     for the user account and then create the connection to the device as the
 | |
|     user:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o On the device, in \gui Programs, select \c {X Terminal} to open a
 | |
|         terminal window.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To switch to the root user, enter the following command:
 | |
|         \c{sudo gainroot}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o To specify the password, enter the following command:
 | |
|         \c {passwd user}
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o In Qt Creator, Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Projects >
 | |
|         \gui{Maemo Device Configurations}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Specify the username \c user and the password in the device configuration.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \section2 Generating SSH Keys
 | |
| 
 | |
|          If you do not have an SSH public and private key pair, you can generate it
 | |
|          in Qt Creator. You can specify key length and the key algorithm, RSA or DSA.
 | |
|          If you only use the keys to protect connections to the Maemo emulator or
 | |
|          device, you can use the default values.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Projects > Maemo Device Configurations
 | |
|              > Generate SSH Key...}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \o Click \gui {Generate SSH Key}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \image qtcreator-ssh-key-configuration.png "SSH Key Configuration dialog"
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \o Click \gui {Save Public Key...} to select the location to save the
 | |
|              public key.
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \o Click \gui {Save Private Key...} to specify the location to save the
 | |
|              private key.
 | |
| 
 | |
|              \o Click \gui Close to close the dialog.
 | |
| 
 | |
|          \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Troubleshooting
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The addresses used in this example might be reserved by some other application
 | |
|     in your network. If you cannot establish a connection, try the following optional
 | |
|     configurations:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o usb0 in Mad Developer on Device
 | |
|             \o USB Network on Development PC
 | |
|             \o Host Name in Qt Creator Build Settings
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o 172.30.7.15 255.255.255.0
 | |
|             \o 172.30.7.14 255.255.255.0
 | |
|             \o 172.30.7.15
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o 10.133.133.15
 | |
|             \o 10.133.133.14
 | |
|             \o 10.133.133.15
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o 192.168.133.15
 | |
|             \o 192.168.133.14
 | |
|             \o 192.168.133.15
 | |
| 
 | |
|             \note You cannot use the value localhost for connections to a device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note VPN connections might block the device connection.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-usability.html
 | |
|     \page creator-maemo-emulator.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-debugging.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Using the Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
 | |
|     applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
 | |
|     on a Nokia N900 device with software update release 1.2 (V10.2010.19-1).
 | |
|     You can test user interaction by using the keypad and
 | |
|     touch emulation.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To test the application UI, user interaction with the application, and
 | |
|     functionality that uses the mobility APIs, use the Qt Simulator,
 | |
|     instead. For more information, see the
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qt-simulator-beta/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Maemo emulator is installed and configured as part of the Nokia Qt SDK
 | |
|     package. You can also install and configure the MADDE environment and
 | |
|     Maemo emulator separately. For more information, see
 | |
|     \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Starting the Maemo Emulator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The \gui {Start Maemo Emulator} button is visible if you have a project
 | |
|     open in Qt Creator for which you have added the Maemo build target
 | |
|     and if you have configured a connection between Qt Creator and the Maemo
 | |
|     Emulator.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To start the Maemo emulator:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-maemo-emulator-button.png "Start Maemo Emulator button"
 | |
|     .
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o Select \gui {Mad Developer} on the Maemo emulator, to start the Mad Developer
 | |
|     application
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o If you have not deployed an SSH key to protect the connection between
 | |
|     Qt Creator and the Maemo emulator, select \gui {Developer Password} to generate
 | |
|     a password.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o In Qt Creator, enter the password in the connection settings:
 | |
|     \gui {Tools > Options... > Projects > Maemo Device Configurations}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Test your application on the Maemo emulator as on a device. For a list of
 | |
|     keyboard shortcuts that you can use to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions, see
 | |
|     \l {Emulating Nokia N900 Keys}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Emulating Nokia N900 Keys
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use
 | |
|     to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Nokia N900 Key
 | |
|             \o Keyboard Shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o \list
 | |
|                 \o Alphabet keys
 | |
|                 \o Comma (,)
 | |
|                 \o Period (.)
 | |
|                 \o Space
 | |
|                 \o Arrow keys
 | |
|                 \o Enter
 | |
|                 \o Backspace
 | |
|                \endlist
 | |
|             \o Respective keys on the development PC keyboard.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Shift
 | |
|             \o Left Shift key
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Ctrl
 | |
|             \o Left Ctrl key
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Mode
 | |
|             \o Left Alt key
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Power
 | |
|             \o Esc
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Keypad slider open and close
 | |
|             \o F1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Keypad lock
 | |
|             \o F2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Camera lens open and close
 | |
|             \o F3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Camera focus
 | |
|             \o F4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Camera take picture
 | |
|             \o F5
 | |
|             \note The actual camera functionality is not emulated.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Stereo headphones connect and disconnect
 | |
|             \o F6
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Volume down
 | |
|             \o F7
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Volume up
 | |
|             \o F8
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer x axis, negative
 | |
|             \o 1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer x axis, positive
 | |
|             \o 2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer z axis, negative
 | |
|             \o 4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer z axis, positive
 | |
|             \o 5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer y axis, negative
 | |
|             \o 7
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Accelerometer y axis, positive
 | |
|             \o 8
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-developing-maemo.html
 | |
|     \page creator-developing-symbian.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-project-managing-sessions.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about developing applications for the Symbian
 | |
|     platform, select \gui {Help > Index} and look for \gui {Platform Notes},
 | |
|     or see
 | |
|     \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.6/platform-notes-symbian.html}{Platform Notes - Symbian}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Hardware and Software Requirements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Windows is the only development platform for the Symbian target
 | |
|     supported at the moment.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For deploying and running applications on the device, you need the
 | |
|     following:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o The Nokia USB drivers that come with \e{PC Suite} or \e{Ovi Suite}
 | |
|         \o The \l{http://tools.ext.nokia.com/trk/}{App TRK} application for
 | |
|            your device
 | |
|         \o The \e{qt_installer.sis} package installed on the device, that is
 | |
|          delivered with the Qt SDK
 | |
|          \o \e {Qt Mobility APIs} installed on the device, if you use them in
 | |
|          applications
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To run your applications in the Symbian emulator, you also need
 | |
|     to install Carbide.c++ v2.0.0 or higher.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Installing Required Applications on Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The Nokia Qt SDK installation program creates shortcuts for installing
 | |
|     the required applications on Symbian devices (you can also use any of
 | |
|     the standard methods for installing applications on devices):
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Connect the device to the development PC with an USB cable in
 | |
|         PC Suite Mode. If you have not previously used the device with Ovi Suite
 | |
|         or PC Suite, all the necessary drivers are installed automatically.
 | |
|         This takes approximately one minute.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Start > Nokia Qt SDK > Symbian > Install Qt to Symbian
 | |
|         device} and follow the instructions on the screen to install Qt 4.6.2
 | |
|         libraries on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Start > Nokia Qt SDK > Symbian > Install QtMobility to Symbian
 | |
|         device} and follow the instructions on the screen to install Qt
 | |
|         mobility libraries on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Choose \gui {Start > Nokia Qt SDK > Symbian > Install TRK to Symbian
 | |
|         device} and follow the instructions on the screen to install the TRK
 | |
|         debugging application on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \note To check the Symbian platform version of your device, see
 | |
|         \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/devices}{Device Details}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If errors occur during the installation, copy the .sis files from
 | |
|     \c {<NokiaQtSDK_install_path>\Symbian\sis} to the device using USB storage
 | |
|     mode. Then install them from the file manager on the device.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Adding Symbian Platform SDKs
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Nokia Qt SDK contains all the tools you need for developing Qt applications for
 | |
|     Symbian devices. To use Symbian APIs directly in your applications, you can
 | |
|     install additional Symbian Platform SDKs:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/main/resources/tools_and_sdks/S60SDK/}
 | |
|            {S60 Platform SDK 3rd Edition FP1 or higher}.
 | |
|         \o Either the GCCE ARM Toolchain that is included in the Symbian
 | |
|            SDKs, or RVCT 2.2 [build 686] or later (which is not available free
 | |
|            of charge)(Your environment needs to find the compiler in the PATH).
 | |
|         \o Qt for Symbian 4.6.2 or later, installed into the Symbian SDKs you want
 | |
|            to use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Setting Up Qt Creator
 | |
| 
 | |
|     When you run Qt Creator after installing the Symbian SDK and Qt for
 | |
|     Symbian, the installed SDKs and their corresponding Qt versions are
 | |
|     automatically detected. For each detected Symbian SDK with Qt, a special entry
 | |
|     is made in the Qt version management settings in \gui{Tools} >
 | |
|     \gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{Qt Versions}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note If you manually add a Qt version for Symbian, you must
 | |
|     also manually specify the Symbian SDK to use for this version.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-symbian.png
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you want to run your applications in the Symbian emulator, you need to
 | |
|     point Qt Creator to the Metrowerks Compiler that you want to use, by
 | |
|     setting the \gui{Carbide directory} of the Qt version to the corresponding
 | |
|     Carbide.c++ installation directory.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can check which Symbian SDKs and corresponding Qt versions are found in the
 | |
|     \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{S60 SDKs} preference
 | |
|     page.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \image qtcreator-qt4-s60sdks.png
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-version-control.html
 | |
|     \page adding-plugins.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-tips.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Adding Qt Designer Plugins
 | |
| 
 | |
|      You can use Qt APIs to create plugins that extend Qt applications.
 | |
|      This allows you to add your own widgets to \QD.
 | |
|      The most flexible way to include a plugin with an application is to compile it
 | |
|      into a dynamic library that is shipped separately, and detected and loaded at runtime.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The applications can detect plugins that are stored in the standard plugin
 | |
|      subdirectories. For more information on how to create and locate plugins and to
 | |
|      change the default plugin path, see \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      For more information about how to create plugins for \QD, see
 | |
|      \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/designer-using-custom-widgets.html}{Creating and Using Components for Qt Designer}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Locating Qt Designer Plugins
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \QD fetches plugins from the standard locations and loads the plugins
 | |
|      that match its build key. \QD is delivered both as a standalone application
 | |
|      and as part of the SDK, where it is integrated into Qt Creator.
 | |
|      The correct folder to place the plugins depends on
 | |
|      which one you use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The integrated \QD fetches plugins from the \c {%SDK%\bin\designer} folder on Windows
 | |
|      and Linux and \c {QtCreator.app/Contents/MacOS/designer} folder on Mac. To check which plugins
 | |
|      were loaded successfully and which failed, choose \gui{Tools > Form Editor >
 | |
|      About Qt Designer Plugins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The standalone \QD is part of the Qt library used for building projects,
 | |
|      located under \c {%SDK%\qt}. Therefore, it fetches plugins from the following folder:
 | |
|      \c {%SDK%\qt\plugins\designer}. To check which plugins were loaded successfully and which
 | |
|      failed, choose \gui{Help > About Plugins}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      \section1 Matching Build Keys
 | |
| 
 | |
|      The Qt Creator that is included in pre-built SDK packages on Windows is built with the
 | |
|      Microsoft Visual Studio compiler, whereas the version of Qt shipped for building applications
 | |
|      is configured and built to use the MinGW/g++ compiler. Plugins built by using this version of
 | |
|      Qt cannot be loaded by Qt Creator because the build-keys do not match. The plugins can only be
 | |
|      used in the standalone version of \QD. Choose \gui{Help > About Qt Creator} to check
 | |
|      the Qt version Qt Creator was built with.
 | |
| 
 | |
|      To use \QD plugins that were built for the shipped Qt version, make sure that
 | |
|      Qt Creator is built with the same compiler by either recompiling Qt Creator using MinGW or
 | |
|      recompiling Qt with Microsoft Visual Studio, depending on which configuration you want to
 | |
|      use for your applications.
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-visual-editor.html
 | |
|     \page creator-usability.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-maemo-emulator.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Before starting application development, analyze and define the requirements, scope, and
 | |
|     functionality of the application to ensure efficient functionality and a smooth user
 | |
|     experience. Design the application for a single purpose and analyze how it can best serve
 | |
|     its users. Mobile devices have been designed for use when mobile. Keep the characteristics
 | |
|     of mobile devices in mind when you create applications for them.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following guidelines help you design and develop usable applications for mobile devices
 | |
|     with varying characteristics, such as screen size and support for input methods:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Know your users
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Find out who will use the application, what they will use it for,
 | |
|         and which mobile devices they have. Then design the application to fit a specific context
 | |
|         of use.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Design for small screens
 | |
| 
 | |
|         The screen size of mobile devices is significantly smaller
 | |
|         than that available on desktop devices. Carefully consider what is the most relevant
 | |
|         content to present on the application UI, as it might not be reasonable to try and fit as
 | |
|         much content into the screen as you might have in a desktop application.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design for multiple screen sizes
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Relate the position and size of each control to the
 | |
|        dimensions of the display. This enables the same set of information to be presented on the
 | |
|        screen in all resolutions; higher resolution devices just display finer graphics.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design for changing screen orientation
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Some devices support screen rotation. On these
 | |
|        devices, applications can be displayed in portrait or landscape orientation. Account for
 | |
|        orientation and dynamically adjust the display when the screen is rotated.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design intuitive ways of moving within applications
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Mobile devices lack a mouse and
 | |
|        full-size keyboard, so users must use the touch screen or five way navigation pad to move within
 | |
|        applications. In addition, many users control the devices with one hand. To create an optimized user
 | |
|        experience, allow users to access information with one click; do not make them scroll and type.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Design for limited input methods
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Applications collect information from users on the task
 | |
|        at hand. In addition to touch screen input, some devices contain physical keys such
 | |
|        as a five way navigation pad, a keypad, and a keyboard. Users enter information by using screen
 | |
|        controls, such as lists, check boxes, radio buttons, and text fields.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Keep response times short
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Latency can cause delays in user interaction. If users perceive
 | |
|        an application as being slow, they are likely to get frustrated and stop using it.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Save battery time
 | |
| 
 | |
|        Mobile devices are not constantly connected to a power source but run on
 | |
|        battery power. Optimize power consumption to keep the total consumption at an acceptable
 | |
|        level and to prevent users from running out of battery time.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Consider network issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|        If users do not have a flat-rate data plan or WLAN support, mobile
 | |
|        network connections cost them money. Also, when users move around with the devices, the networks
 | |
|        available for connections constantly change.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \o Remember the processing limits of the device
 | |
| 
 | |
|        The memory available on devices is limited
 | |
|        and you should use it carefully. Although all mobile devices have common functionality,
 | |
|        each device is individual in terms of both the resources available and extra features.
 | |
|        Therefore, you must consider the constraints of all the target devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|        \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|        For more information about user experience techniques for mobile devices, see the
 | |
|        \l{http://library.forum.nokia.com/topic/Design_and_User_Experience_Library/GUID-A8DF3EB8-E97C-4DA0-95F6-F464ECC995BC_cover.html}{Design and User Experience Library}
 | |
|        on Forum Nokia.
 | |
| 
 | |
|  */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage adding-plugins.html
 | |
|     \page creator-tips.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Tips and Tricks
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Switching between modes
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator uses different modes for different purposes. You can quickly
 | |
|     switch between these modes with the following keyboard shortcuts:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o \gui Welcome mode \key Ctrl+1
 | |
|         \o \gui Edit mode \key Ctrl+2
 | |
|         \o \gui Design mode \key Ctrl+3
 | |
|         \o \gui Debug mode \key Ctrl+4
 | |
|         \o \gui Projects mode \key Ctrl+5
 | |
|         \o \gui Help mode \key Ctrl+6
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information about Qt Creator modes, see \l {Qt Creator Modes}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving Between Open Files
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To quickly move between currently open files, press
 | |
|     \key Ctrl+Tab.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving To the Edit Mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move to the \gui Edit mode and currently active file, press
 | |
|     \key Esc.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If you already are in the \gui Edit mode:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o The first press moves focus to the editor
 | |
|         \o The second press closes secondary windows
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using the Filter in Options Dialog
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To find specific settings you require in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...}
 | |
|     use the filter located at the top left of the \gui Options dialog box.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Using Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}{many useful keyboard shortcuts}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To customize, import or export keyboard shortcuts, select \gui Tools >
 | |
|     \gui Options... > \gui Environment > \gui Keyboard.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Running Qt Creator From Command Line
 | |
| 
 | |
|     You can launch Qt Creator from command line using the name of an
 | |
|     existing session or \c .pro file by giving the name as the command
 | |
|     argument.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For example, running \tt{qtcreator somesession}, launches Qt Creator and
 | |
|     loads session somesession.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \note Make sure Qt Creator is included in the PATH environment variable.
 | |
|     This can be done by typing the following in the command line:
 | |
|     \code
 | |
|     set PATH=c:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;c:\qtsdk\qt\bin;%PATH%
 | |
|     \endcode
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Showing and Hiding the Sidebar
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To toggle the sidebar in the \gui Edit and \gui Debug modes, click
 | |
|     \inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
 | |
|     or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on using the sidebar, see \l {Browsing Project Contents}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Moving To Symbols
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To move straight to a symbol used in a project, select the symbol in the
 | |
|     \gui Editor toolbar drop-down menu.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For more information on the editor toolbar,
 | |
|     see \l {Using the Editor Toolbar}.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Displaying Signals and Slots
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If an instance of a class is derived from QObject, and you would like to
 | |
|     find all other objects connected to one of your object's slots using
 | |
|     Qt's signals and slots mechanism, select \gui Tools > \gui Options...
 | |
|     > \gui{Debugger} > \gui{Debugging Helper} > \gui{Use Debugging Helper}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     In the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, expand the object's entry and open
 | |
|     the slot in the \e slots subitem. The objects connected to this slot are
 | |
|     shown as children of the slot. This method works with signals too.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Displaying Low Level Data
 | |
| 
 | |
|     If special debugging of Qt objects fails due to data corruption within the
 | |
|     debugged objects, you can switch off the debugging helpers. When debugging
 | |
|     helpers are switched off low-level structures become visible.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To switch off the debugging helpers:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Debugger >
 | |
|            \gui{Debugging Helper}.
 | |
|         \o Uncheck the \gui{Use Debugging Helper} checkbox.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-tips.html
 | |
|     \page creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-known-issues.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator provides various keyboard shortcuts to speed up your development
 | |
|     process.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     To customize a keyboard shortcut:
 | |
|     \list 1
 | |
|         \o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Environment >
 | |
|            \gui Keyboard.
 | |
|         \o Select an action from the list.
 | |
|         \o In \gui{Key Sequence} enter the shortcut key you want to associate
 | |
|            with the selected action.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator allows you to use different keyboard shortcut mapping schemes:
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o To import a keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click \gui Import
 | |
|            and select the kms file containing keyboard shortcut mapping scheme
 | |
|            you want to import.
 | |
|         \o To export the current keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click
 | |
|            \gui Export and select the location where you want to save the
 | |
|            exported kms file.
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Default Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     The following tables list the default keyboard shortcuts. They are
 | |
|     categorized by actions.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 General Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Open file or project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+O
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o New file or project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+N
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Open in external editor
 | |
|             \o Alt+V, Alt+I
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Cut
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+X
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Copy
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+C
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Paste
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+V
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Redo
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Y
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Save
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+S
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Save all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+A
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Close window
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+W
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Close all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+W
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go back
 | |
|             \o Alt+Left
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go forward
 | |
|             \o Alt+Right
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to line
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+L
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Next open document in history
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+Tab
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Goto other split
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, O
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Previous open document in history
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Tab
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui Locator
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+K
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Welcome mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Edit mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Design mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Debug mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Projects mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch to \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+6
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Build Issues} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+1 (Cmd+1 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Search Results} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+2 (Cmd+2 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Application Output} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+3 (Cmd+3 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle \gui{Compile Output} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+4 (Cmd+4 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui Bookmarks pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+M
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui{File System} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+Y
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui{Open Documents} pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+O
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate \gui Projects pane
 | |
|             \o Alt+X
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Full screen
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+F11
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle the sidebar
 | |
|             \o Alt+0 (Cmd+0 on Mac OS X)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Undo
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Z
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Move to \gui Edit mode
 | |
| 
 | |
|                In \gui Edit mode:
 | |
|                \list
 | |
|                 \o The first press moves focus to the editor
 | |
|                 \o The second press closes secondary windows
 | |
|                \endlist
 | |
|             \o Esc
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Auto-indent selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+I
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Collapse
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+<
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Expand
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+>
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Trigger a completion in this scope
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Space
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Copy line down
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Alt+Down
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Copy line up
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Alt+Up
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Cut line
 | |
|             \o Shift+Del
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Join lines
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+J
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Decrease font size
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+- (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel down)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Increase font size
 | |
|             \o Ctrl++ (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel up)
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle Vim-style editing
 | |
|             \o Alt+V, Alt+V
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Split
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Split side by side
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Remove all splits
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Remove current split
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, 0
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Select all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+A
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block end
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+]
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block start
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+[
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block end with selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+}
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to block start with selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+{
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Move current line down
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+Down
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Move current line up
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+Up
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Trigger a quick fix in this scope
 | |
|             \o Alt+Return
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Rewrap paragraph
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, R
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Select the current block
 | |
| 
 | |
|                The second press extends the selection to the parent block
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+U
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Enable text wrapping
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+W
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle comment for selection
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+/
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Visualize whitespace
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+V
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Delete
 | |
|             \o Del
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Adjust size
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+J
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Lay out in a grid
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+G
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Lay out horizontally
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+H
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Lay out vertically
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+L
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Preview
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Alt+R
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Edit signals and slots
 | |
|             \o F4
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Edit widgets
 | |
|             \o F3
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle bookmark
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+M
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to next bookmark
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+.
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Go to previous bookmark
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+,
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Fetch snippet
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+F
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Paste snippet
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+P
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Find usages
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+U
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Follow symbol under cursor
 | |
| 
 | |
|                Works with namespaces, classes, methods, variables, include
 | |
|                statements and macros
 | |
|             \o F2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Rename symbol under cursor
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+R
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch between method declaration and definition
 | |
|             \o Shift+F2
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Switch between header and source file
 | |
|             \o F4
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Debugging Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Start debugging
 | |
|             \o F5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Stop or interrupt debugger
 | |
|             \o Shift+F5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Reset debugger
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+F5
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Step over
 | |
|             \o F10
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Step into
 | |
|             \o F11
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Step out
 | |
|             \o Shift+F11
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Toggle breakpoint
 | |
|             \o F9
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Project Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Build project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+B
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Build all
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+B
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o New project
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+Shift+N
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Run
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+R
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Help Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o Action
 | |
|             \o Keyboard shortcut
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o View context-sensitive help
 | |
|             \o F1
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate contents in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+T
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Add bookmark in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+M
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate index in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+I
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Reset font size in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+0
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Activate search in \gui Help mode
 | |
|             \o Ctrl+S
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section2 Version Control Keyboard Shortcuts
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o {1,2} Action
 | |
|             \o {5,1} Version control system
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o CVS
 | |
|             \o Git
 | |
|             \o Perforce
 | |
|             \o Subversion
 | |
|             \o Mercurial
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Add
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+A
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+A
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+S, Alt+A
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Commit
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+C
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+C
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+C
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Diff
 | |
|             \o Alt+C, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+S, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+D
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Diff project
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Blame
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+B
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Log
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+L
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+F
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+L
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Log project
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+K
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Status
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+S
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+H, Alt+S
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Undo changes
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+U
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Diff project
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+D
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Edit
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+E
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Opened
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+O
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Revert
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+R
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o Submit
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o Alt+P, Alt+S
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-known-issues.html
 | |
|     \page creator-glossary.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-acknowledgements.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Glossary
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \table
 | |
|         \header
 | |
|             \o  Term
 | |
|             \o  Meaning
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|                 \raw HTML
 | |
|                 Qt in PATH
 | |
|                 \endraw
 | |
|                 \target glossary-system-qt
 | |
|             \o  This is the Qt
 | |
|                 version for the \c qmake command found in your \c PATH
 | |
|                 environment variable.
 | |
|                 This is likely to be the system's Qt version.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|                 \raw HTML
 | |
|                 Project Qt
 | |
|                 \endraw
 | |
|                 \target glossary-project-qt
 | |
|             \o  The version of Qt configured in the \gui{Projects} mode, \gui {Build
 | |
|                 Settings}, \gui {Qt Version} field. This is the Qt version that
 | |
|                 is actually used by a particular project.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \row
 | |
|             \o
 | |
|                 \raw HTML
 | |
|                 Shadow build
 | |
|                 \endraw
 | |
|                 \target glossary-shadow-build
 | |
|             \o  Shadow building means building a project in a separate
 | |
|                 directory, the \e{build directory}. The build directory is
 | |
|                 different from the source directory. One of the benefits of
 | |
|                 shadow building is that it keeps your source directory clean.
 | |
|                 Shadow building is the best practice if you need many build
 | |
|                 configurations for a single set of source.
 | |
|     \endtable
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
 | |
|     \page creator-known-issues.html
 | |
|     \nextpage creator-glossary.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Known Issues
 | |
| 
 | |
|     This section lists known issues in Qt Creator version 2.0.0.
 | |
|     The development team is aware of them, and therefore, you do not need to
 | |
|     report them as bugs.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     For a list of fixed issues and added features, see the changelog file in
 | |
|     the \c{qtcreator\dist} folder or the \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 General
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Qt Creator uses SQLite for storing some of its settings. SQLite is
 | |
|            known to have problems with certain NFS servers (most notably the
 | |
|            nfs-user-server 2.2beta), since they can lock up the application
 | |
|            when it tries to lock the database. If your home directory is on an
 | |
|            NFS share and you encounter this issue, one option would be to
 | |
|            switch to the nfs-kernel-server, or create a symlink so that the
 | |
|            settings are stored locally.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Editing
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Code completion does not support typedefs for nested classes.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Projects
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|         \o Paths or file names containing spaces or special characters, e.g.,
 | |
|            colons, dollar signs, hash marks etc. may cause problems. This
 | |
|            is because some of the tools Qt Creator uses in the background have
 | |
|            restrictions on the characters allowed in file and directory names.
 | |
|            To be on the safe side, we recommend creating projects and project
 | |
|            items with names consisting of plain characters, numbers,
 | |
|            underscores, and hyphens.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o There is no IDE support for adding/removing sub-projects. Project
 | |
|            hierarchies (SUBDIRS template) have to be created manually.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Creating new \c CMake projects with Qt Creator is not supported.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Building and packaging sub-projects is not supported for Maemo devices.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o You must create projects for Maemo targets on the same partition where
 | |
|         you installed Nokia Qt SDK, Qt Creator, and MADDE.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Debugging
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o When debugging executables created by the GNU Compiler version 4.5.0
 | |
|            (all platforms), some data types will not be displayed in the
 | |
|            \gui{Locals and Watchers} view due to missing debug information.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o On Windows, debugging a MinGW-built console application (with \gui{Run in terminal}
 | |
|            checked) using gdb does not work due to a bug in gdb related to attaching to
 | |
|            stopped processes (see \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTCREATORBUG-1020}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Gdb on Windows may not work if the 'Embassy \reg Security Center' software
 | |
|            by 'Wave \reg Systems' is installed and active (causing crashes in \c{vxvault.dll)}).
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Gdb may take long to load debugging symbols, especially from large
 | |
|            libraries like \c libQtWebKit. Starting the debugging module can
 | |
|            take up to several minutes without visible progress.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Setting breakpoints in code that is compiled into the binary more
 | |
|            than once does not work.
 | |
| 
 | |
|         \o Setting breakpoints in files that do not have unique absolute
 | |
|            paths may fail. For example, remounting parts of a file system
 | |
|            using the --bind mount option.
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \endlist
 | |
| 
 | |
| */
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| /*!
 | |
|     \contentspage index.html
 | |
|     \previouspage creator-glossary.html
 | |
|     \page creator-acknowledgements.html
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \title Acknowledgements
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \section1 Third-party Components
 | |
| 
 | |
|     Qt Creator contains the following third-party components:
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \list
 | |
|     \o  \bold{Open Source front-end for C++ (license MIT)}, enhanced for use in
 | |
|         Qt Creator.\br
 | |
|         Roberto Raggi <roberto.raggi@gmail.com>\br
 | |
|         QtCreator/src/shared/cplusplus\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o  \bold{Botan, a C++ crypto library. Version 1.8.8}\br
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o  Copyright (C) 1999-2004 The Botan Project. All rights reserved.
 | |
|         \o  Copyright (C) 1999-2009 Jack Lloyd
 | |
|         \o  2001 Peter J Jones
 | |
|         \o  2004-2007 Justin Karneges
 | |
|         \o  2005 Matthew Gregan
 | |
|         \o  2005-2006 Matt Johnston
 | |
|         \o  2006 Luca Piccarreta
 | |
|         \o  2007 Yves Jerschow
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 FlexSecure GmbH
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 Technische Universitat Darmstadt
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 Falko Strenzke
 | |
|         \o  2007-2008 Martin Doering
 | |
|         \o  2007 Manuel Hartl
 | |
|         \o  2007 Christoph Ludwig
 | |
|         \o  2007 Patrick Sona
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|         All rights reserved.\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 | |
|         modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
 | |
|         met:\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
 | |
|         notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.\br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
 | |
|         notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
 | |
|         documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.\br
 | |
|         \br
 | |
| 
 | |
|         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 | |
|         IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 | |
|         WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
 | |
|         ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) OR CONTRIBUTOR(S) BE
 | |
|         LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 | |
|         CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 | |
|         SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
 | |
|         BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
 | |
|         WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 | |
|         OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
 | |
|         IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.\br\br
 | |
|         The source code of Botan C++ crypto library can be found
 | |
|         here:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
 | |
|         \o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|         \br\br
 | |
| 
 | |
|     \o  \bold{NetSieben SSH Library is a Secure Shell client library for C++.
 | |
|          Version 1.3.2}\br
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o \bold{Commercial License:} For organizations who do not want to
 | |
|             release the source code for their applications as open source/
 | |
|             free software; in other words they do not want to comply with the
 | |
|             GNU General Public License (GPL) or Q Public License.
 | |
|         \o \bold{Non Commercial / Open Source License:} NetSieben believes in
 | |
|             contributing back to the open source community, thus it has released
 | |
|             the SSH Library under Q Public License as it is defined by Trolltech
 | |
|             AS of Norway. The Open Source License allows the user to use software
 | |
|             under an open source / free software license, and distribute it
 | |
|             freely. The software can be used at no charge with the condition
 | |
|             that if the user uses the SSH Library in an application they wish to
 | |
|             redistribute, then the complete source code for your application must
 | |
|             be available and freely redistributable under reasonable conditions.
 | |
|             For more information on the used QPL License see:
 | |
|             QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty/net7ssh/LICENSE.QPL
 | |
|         \endlist\br\br
 | |
|         The source code of NetSieben Secure Shell C++ Library can be found
 | |
|         here:
 | |
|         \list
 | |
|         \o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
 | |
|         \o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
 | |
|         \endlist
 | |
|      \endlist
 | |
| */
 |